+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Date post: 22-Oct-2021
Category:
Upload: others
View: 4 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
254
Instruction manual Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN © 2008 Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG, Isny Instruction manual Congratulations We congratulate you on your new motorhome and would like to thank you for choosing a quality product from Dethleffs. Whether you want to enjoy your holidays on good or bad roads, whether you want to have your "holiday home" out in the country, at the seaside or in the mountains: Your Dethleffs motorhome will always make sure that you can enjoy your holidays because the Dethleffs team has been building caravans for more than seventy years and knows what is important. This experience shows itself in the well thought-out, cosy and yet highly functional equipment as well as in the outstanding driving characteristics. Each Dethleffs vehicle is manufactured with great care and the quality is closely checked. This ensures that our products have a long service life. In view of these strict requirements, we guarantee top quality of our prod- ucts and grant you a six year leakage guarantee of the body in accordance with our guarantee conditions (see section 1.2). This instruction manual deals primarily with the body of your motorhome. It will give you all important informa- tion and tips so that you can enjoy all technical advantages of your Dethleffs motorhome to the full. We have also included a chapter on maintenance – and thus on the conservation of value. In addition, you will find the documents on the base vehicle and the various built-in appliances. For maintenance work or whenever you need some help, please always get in touch with your authorised spe- cialist workshop. They know your motorhome best of all, and will meet all your requests fast and reliably. In the event of chassis-related problems with Dethleff vehicles, authorised workshops of the base vehicle man- ufacturer are able to provide assistance. If you encounter problems on the Fiat chassis, please call the phone number 00800 34281111. We wish you a lot of fun with your motorhome, a relaxing holiday and safe driving at all times. Your Dethleffs team
Transcript
Page 1: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Instruction manual

Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

© 2008 Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG, Isny

Instruction manualCongratulations

We congratulate you on your new motorhome and would like to thank you for choosing a quality product from Dethleffs.

Whether you want to enjoy your holidays on good or bad roads, whether you want to have your "holiday home" out in the country, at the seaside or in the mountains: Your Dethleffs motorhome will always make sure that you can enjoy your holidays because the Dethleffs team has been building caravans for more than seventy years and knows what is important. This experience shows itself in the well thought-out, cosy and yet highly functional equipment as well as in the outstanding driving characteristics.

Each Dethleffs vehicle is manufactured with great care and the quality is closely checked. This ensures that our products have a long service life. In view of these strict requirements, we guarantee top quality of our prod-ucts and grant you a six year leakage guarantee of the body in accordance with our guarantee conditions (see section 1.2).

This instruction manual deals primarily with the body of your motorhome. It will give you all important informa-tion and tips so that you can enjoy all technical advantages of your Dethleffs motorhome to the full. We have also included a chapter on maintenance – and thus on the conservation of value.

In addition, you will find the documents on the base vehicle and the various built-in appliances.

For maintenance work or whenever you need some help, please always get in touch with your authorised spe-cialist workshop. They know your motorhome best of all, and will meet all your requests fast and reliably.

In the event of chassis-related problems with Dethleff vehicles, authorised workshops of the base vehicle man-ufacturer are able to provide assistance. If you encounter problems on the Fiat chassis, please call the phone number 00800 34281111.

We wish you a lot of fun with your motorhome, a relaxing holiday and safe driving at all times.

Your Dethleffs team

Page 2: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Instruction manual

Page 3: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

3Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Contents

1 Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71.1 Guarantee certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71.2 Guarantee conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.3 Inspection records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91.4 Inspection plan for annual

inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.5 Inspection plan for water

ingress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162.2 Environmental tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193.1 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193.1.2 Fire-fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193.1.3 In case of fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203.3 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223.5 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223.5.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233.6 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243.7 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

4 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 254.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van. . . . . . . . . . . 254.1.2 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254.2 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264.3 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264.3.1 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274.3.2 Calculating the payload. . . . . . . . . . . . 294.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly. . . . . . . . 304.3.4 Roof load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space . . . . . 324.3.6 Double floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334.3.7 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334.3.8 Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344.5 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354.5.1 Mechanically operated entrance

step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354.5.2 Electrically operated entrance step . . . 354.6 PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364.7 Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374.8 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374.9 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

5 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 415.1 Driving the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . 415.2 Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425.3 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425.4 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly . . . . . 43

5.5 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

5.5.1 Seats (Aguti) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435.5.2 Seats (ISRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445.6 Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455.7 Backrest adjustment mechanism

for bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465.8 Seating arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465.9 Branch block (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475.10 Electrical window winders (model I). . . 475.11 Electrically adjustable external

mirrors (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485.12 Roman shades for windscreen,

driver's window and front passenger's window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

5.13 Writing and reading rest . . . . . . . . . . . 495.14 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495.14.1 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505.14.2 Fortero, Van. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505.15 Filling washer fluid (model I) . . . . . . . . 515.16 Checking the oil level (model I) . . . . . . 515.17 Filling up with diesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

6 Pitching the motorhome . . . . . . 536.1 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536.2 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536.3 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536.4 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536.4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536.4.2 Steady legs (Sawiko) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556.5 240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

7 Living . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577.1 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577.1.1 Conversion door, outside . . . . . . . . . . 577.1.2 Conversion door, outside

(with recessed handle). . . . . . . . . . . . . 587.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal) . . . . 587.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob) . . 597.1.5 Conversion door, inside

(with locking lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal) . . . . . 607.1.7 Driver's door, outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607.1.8 Driver's door, inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617.1.9 Insect screen door, can be

folded out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617.1.10 Insect screen on the conversion

door, extendable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627.1.11 Window of conversion door

(Hartal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627.2 External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle . . . . . . 637.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped. . . . . . . . . . 637.2.3 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647.3 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Page 4: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Contents

4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

7.4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657.4.1 Sliding window with lock . . . . . . . . . . . 667.4.2 Sliding window without lock . . . . . . . . . 667.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges . . . . 667.4.4 Hinged window with automatic

hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687.4.5 Blind and insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 697.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen . . . . . 707.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen,

driver's window and front passenger's window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

7.5 Skylights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1) . . . 727.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2) . . . 737.5.3 Hinged skylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747.5.4 Heki skylight (mini and midi) . . . . . . . . 757.5.5 Wind-up skylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767.6 Rotating seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777.7 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg . . . . 777.7.2 Swivel table for the round seating

group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797.7.3 Fixed table (movable table-top) . . . . . . 807.7.4 Fixed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807.7.5 Lift-off table for the round seating

group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827.8 Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827.9 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837.10 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847.11 Extending the seating group . . . . . . . . 847.11.1 Extending the central seating

group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847.12 Beds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857.12.1 Overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . 867.12.3 Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887.12.4 Bunk bed (side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897.12.5 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) . . . . 907.13 Converting seating groups for

sleeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917.13.1 Central seating group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917.13.2 Central seating group with

extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927.13.3 Central seating group with divan . . . . . 937.13.4 Round seating group

(without slatted frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947.13.5 Round seating group

(with slatted frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957.13.6 Front bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967.13.7 Front bench seat with divan . . . . . . . . . 977.13.8 Front bench seat with divan

(extendable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987.13.9 Front seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

8 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018.2 Gas bottles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

8.3 Gas consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1038.4 Changing gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . .1048.5 Gas isolator taps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1058.6 External gas connection . . . . . . . . . .1058.7 Duomatic switching facility . . . . . . . . .106

9 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . .1099.1 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . .1099.2 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1099.3 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1109.3.1 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1109.4 Charging the living area battery

and starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1129.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power

supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1129.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine . . .1129.4.3 Charging with an external charger . . .1129.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99) . . . . . .1139.5.1 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .1159.5.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .1159.5.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1159.5.4 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1169.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) . . . . .1169.6.1 Battery separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1189.6.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .1189.6.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1189.6.4 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1199.7 Panel IT 20-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1199.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage

and water or waste water levels . . . . .1199.7.2 Battery alarm for the living area

battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1219.7.3 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1219.7.4 12 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1219.7.5 240 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1219.8 Panel IT 992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1229.8.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage

and water or waste water levels . . . . .1229.8.2 Battery alarm for the living area

battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1239.8.3 Current gauge for charging/

discharging the living area battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

9.8.4 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1249.8.5 12 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1259.8.6 240 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1259.8.7 Switch for water pump . . . . . . . . . . . .1259.9 Panel DT 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1259.9.1 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1259.9.2 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1279.9.3 Basic menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1279.9.4 Battery menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1289.9.5 Battery alarm for the living area

battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1309.9.6 Battery capacity alarm for the

living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Page 5: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

5Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Contents

9.9.7 Battery defect message for living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

9.9.8 Tank menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309.9.9 Tank alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319.10 240 V power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319.10.1 240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319.10.2 Power cable for external 240 V

connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329.11 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329.11.1 12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329.11.2 240 V fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

10 Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13710.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13710.2 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13810.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the

right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . 13810.2.2 To heat properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13810.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater . . . . . . . 13910.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . 14110.2.5 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 14310.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger . . . 14810.2.7 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . 14910.2.8 Heater for waste water tank and

waste water pipes (winter comfort package). . . . . . . . . . 150

10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit . . . . . . . 15010.3 Air conditioning unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15110.3.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15110.3.2 Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15310.4 Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15410.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the

right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . 15510.4.2 Truma Combi boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15510.4.3 Trumatic C boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15810.4.4 Alde boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16010.5 Cooker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16110.5.1 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16110.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16210.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16310.5.4 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16410.5.5 Extractor hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16510.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16610.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill . . . . . . . . 16610.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series,

automatic ignition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16610.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series with

automatic power selection and frame heater). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

10.6.4 Operation (Thetford) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17010.6.5 Refrigerator door locking

mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

11 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17511.1 Water supply, general . . . . . . . . . . . . 17511.2 Switch for water pump

(winter comfort package). . . . . . . . . . 176

11.3 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17611.3.1 Fresh water filler neck with lid . . . . . . 17611.3.2 Water drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17711.3.3 Filling with water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17711.3.4 Draining water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17811.4 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17811.4.1 Waste water tank

(models with double floor) . . . . . . . . . 17911.4.2 Waste water tank

(models without double floor) . . . . . . 17911.4.3 Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18011.5 Filling the water system . . . . . . . . . . . 18011.6 Emptying the water system . . . . . . . . 18111.7 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18211.8 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18311.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18311.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18511.8.3 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 18511.8.4 Removing the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . 18611.8.5 Emptying the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . 18711.9 Vario toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18711.9.1 Converting into a shower cubicle. . . . 18811.9.2 Conversion to toilet compartment . . . 188

12 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18912.1 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18912.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure

cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18912.1.2 Washing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18912.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass . . . . . . . . . . 19012.1.4 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19012.1.5 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19012.1.6 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19012.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat

(model I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19112.2 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19112.3 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19212.4 Toilets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19212.4.1 Toilet with separate water tank . . . . . 19312.4.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 19312.5 Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19412.5.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19412.5.2 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19412.5.3 At the end of the winter season . . . . . 19412.6 Lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19512.6.1 Temporary lay-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19512.6.2 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19612.6.3 Starting up the vehicle after a

temporary lay-up or after lay-up over winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

13 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19913.1 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19913.2 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19913.3 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 19913.3.1 Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 20013.3.2 Topping up heating fluid . . . . . . . . . . 200

Page 6: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Contents

6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system . . . . . . . 20113.4 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . 20113.5 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20113.5.1 Truma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20213.5.2 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20213.6 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent

tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20213.6.1 Ceiling lamp (cover with screws) . . . . 20313.6.2 Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20313.6.3 Halogen spotlight

(with glass shade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20413.6.4 Halogen spotlight (movable) . . . . . . . 20413.6.5 Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20413.6.6 Living area lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20513.6.7 Recessed halogen light

with housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20513.6.8 Recessed halogen light (flat) . . . . . . . 20613.6.9 Surface-mounted halogen light

driver's cabin (model I). . . . . . . . . . . . 20613.6.10 Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20713.7 Changing the battery of the

wardrobe light with LED . . . . . . . . . . . 20713.8 AL-KO rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20813.9 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20813.10 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . 20913.11 Warning and information stickers. . . . 210

14 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 21114.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21114.2 Tyre selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21214.3 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21314.4 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21314.5 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21314.6 Spare wheel support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21414.6.1 Spare wheel support under the

vehicle (Renault) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21414.7 Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

15 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21715.1 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21715.2 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21715.3 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22015.4 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22015.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22015.4.2 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22015.5 Heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22115.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22115.5.2 Alde heater/boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22215.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22215.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES . . . 22315.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES

(error diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22315.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series

with AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22415.7 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22515.7.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22515.7.2 Truma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

15.8 Water supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22615.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . .22715.10 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

16 Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . .22916.1 Weight details for special

equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

17 Helpful notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23317.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . .23317.2 Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . .23317.3 Speed limits and permissible

dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23517.4 Driving with low beam in

European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23817.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away

from camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23917.6 Gas supply in European countries . . .24117.7 Toll regulations in

European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24117.8 Tips on staying overnight

safely during travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24117.9 Tips for winter campers . . . . . . . . . . .24217.10 Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Page 7: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

7Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee 1

1Guarantee1.1 Guarantee certificate

We reserve the right to alter the construction, equipment and the scope of delivery. Special equipment is also listed that is not included in the standard scope of delivery. The descriptions and illustrations in this brochure do not relate to a particular version. For all details, only the respective equipment list is valid.

Vehicle data

Model:

Car manufacturer/type of engine:

Serial number:

Initial registration:

Purchased from company:

Expiry of the guarantee period:

Key number:

Chassis number:

Customer Address

Surname, Christian name:

Street, No.:

Postal code, town:

Dealer's stamp and signature

Page 8: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee1

1.2 Guarantee conditions

1. In addition to the legal guarantee and product warranty rights due to the customer, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG may also grant a guarantee of six years that the vehicles constructed by the company are sealed in such a manner that moisture cannot penetrate from the outside into the interior of the vehicle.The guarantee obligations do not apply if the leakage is a result of improper handling of the windows, doors and skylights or damage that has not been properly repaired. Damage that is caused by forces of nature (e.g. flooding) is not covered by the guarantee. The guarantee extensions include only the correct repair work. Conversion or diminution as well as travelling expenses or other indirect costs are not covered by the guarantee.

2. When dealing with a case of leakage covered under the conditions of this guarantee, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG is obliged to rectify the defective vehicle part concerned by repairing it free of charge or replacing the part, depending on what is necessary to immediately to repair the damage.Defects are to be rectified by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or by an author-ised specialist workshop in accordance with the guidelines of Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.

3. The prerequisite for this guarantee is that the vehicle must be presented once a year to an authorised specialist workshop for an inspection. The presentation must take place 2 months at the latest after the anniversary of the initial registration (or delivery).If the inspection is not carried out according to schedule, this will nullify your warranty. It cannot be renewed by carrying out an inspection at a later time.As proof that the inspection has been completed, there are designated cou-pons in the Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG guarantee booklet where inspection stamps are to be glued and endorsed by a stamp, the date and the signa-ture of a respective Dethleffs dealer.

4. The guarantee begins on the day of the initial registration or delivery of the vehicle to the customer, 1 year at the latest after delivery to the dealer, and is valid while the vehicle is in use, for 6 years at the longest. A change of ownership of the purchased object has no effect on the guarantee obliga-tions. The guarantee expires if the terms outlined in paragraph 3 are not complied with. The performance of guarantee work does not increase the guarantee period.

5. Parts installed to rectify faults are also guaranteed under the terms of the guarantee until the guarantee period expires.

6. If leakage occurs, the owner must notify Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or a Dethleffs dealer of this in writing within 15 days of its detection. The guar-antee certificate and the corresponding guarantee stamps must be included with the notification. If notification of leakage does not occur within the time limit stated, no claims can be made under the terms of the guar-antee.Remedying of leakage will take place after approval has been given by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG. If no agreement is reached about the type, extent and result of the repairs, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or the Dethleffs dealer will consult a neutral expert whose decision is binding for all parties involved.

7. The costs of the inspection are to be paid by the party covered by the guar-antee.

8. As far as legally permissible, the court responsible for Isny will be agreed upon as the venue for jurisdiction.

Page 9: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

9Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee 1

1.3 Inspection records

Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary, then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service documents enclosed.

Delivery

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

1st year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

� Water ingress test 1st year

� Water ingress test 1st year

� No defects found� Found defects:

Page 10: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

10 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee1

Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary, then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service documents enclosed.

2nd year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

� Water ingress test 2nd year

� Water ingress test 2nd year

� No defects found� Found defects:

3rd year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

� Water ingress test 3rd year

� Water ingress test 3rd year

� No defects found� Found defects:

Page 11: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

11Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee 1

Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary, then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service documents enclosed.

4th year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

� Water ingress test 4th year

� Water ingress test 4th year

� No defects found� Found defects:

5th year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

� Water ingress test 5th year

� Water ingress test 5th year

� No defects found� Found defects:

Page 12: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

12 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee1

1.4 Inspection plan for annual inspection

We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.

1.5 Inspection plan for water ingress test

Pos. Component Activity Interval

1 Skylights Remove the inside frame of the skylights and tighten the screw connections of the se-curing clips

1. year

2 Auxiliary support Lubrication Annually

3 Joints, hinges Lubrication Annually

4 Refrigerator, heater, boiler, cooker, lighting, storage flap and door closures, toilet, seat belts

Function check Annually

5 Windows, skylights Function check, water ingress test, applying talc to the rubber seals

Annually

6 Upholstery, curtains, blinds Visual check Annually

7 Sealing strips, edges, rubber Check for damage Annually

8 Water supply Water ingress test Annually

9 Hot-air system Function check, clean fan wheel as necessary

Annually

10 Underbody protection, floor skirt attachment

Visual check Annually

11 Pull-down bed suspension Function check Annually

12 Electrical system Function check Annually

13 Gas system Official gas inspection Every two years

14 Connections between the chassis and body

Check Every two years

15 Underbody Visual check, repair un-derbody protection as necessary

Every two years

Pos. Component Activity

1.1 Wheel housing Visual check

1.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Visual check

1.2.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check

1.2.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-tion

Visual check

1.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Visual check

1.3.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check

1.3.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-tion

Visual check

1.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Visual check

Page 13: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

13Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee 1

We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.

1.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Visual check

1.6 Connection to driver's cabin Visual check

1.7 Base frame with base frame cut-outs Visual check

1.8 Check the status of the outer metal sheets Visual check

1.9 Check the status of the window rubbers, expan-sion joints, sealing joints

Visual check

2.1 Measure the floor plateau at this connection point with a moisture measuring device, write down the corresponding values with the date of the assessment. Prescribed maximum values – up to 20 % normal.If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to accumulated condensation.

Measuring

2.2 Measure inside the vehicle (walls, window sec-tions, roof, etc.), note changes in the colour of the decor. Prescribed maximum values – up to 20 % normal.If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to accumulated condensation.

Measuring

3.1 Wheel housing Spray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution

3.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution

3.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution

3.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Spray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution

3.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Spray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution

Pos. Component Activity

Page 14: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

14 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Guarantee1

Page 15: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

15Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Introduction 2

2IntroductionPlease read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time!Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users of the safety regulations.

With your Dethleffs motorhome you will receive a file with the following vehicle manuals and documents:

Dethleffs documents � Instruction manual and service book (housing body)� List of Dethleffs dealers

Additional documents � Operating and installation instructions of various appliances� Complete set of documents from the chassis manufacturer� Test certificate for the gas system in accordance with German regulations

This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-spe-cific equipment or special equipment. These sections are not specially marked. It may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special equipment. In some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may therefore be different from that shown in some illustrations and descrip-tions.

However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not described in this instruction manual.

Special equipment is described when an explanation is required.

Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.

Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the instructions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed invalid.

Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand that we reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. There-fore, no claims can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the con-tents of this instruction manual. The equipment which was known and included at the time of going to press is described.

� The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.

� The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to, or inside the vehicle.

� This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.

� This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.

� The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in direction of travel.

� All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".

� The metric specifications are binding for physical dimensions.

Page 16: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

16 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Introduction2

The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted without prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.

2.1 GeneralThe vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the recognised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and the vehicle may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual are not followed.

Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instruc-tions in the instruction manual.

Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be immediately remedied by qualified personnel.

Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an authorised specialist workshop only.

Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the manufacturer.

The vehicle is designed for the exclusive transport of persons. Luggage and accessories may only be transported up to the maximum permissible gross weight.

Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.

2.2 Environmental tips

� Be considerate of the environment.

� Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to be disposed of in drains or in the open countryside.

� Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at dis-posal stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially pro-vided for this purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe the instructions at caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations.

� On board, collect waste water only in the built-in waste water tank or – if necessary – in other containers designed for that purpose.

� Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not com-pletely full (hygiene).

If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with fresh water every time it is emptied.

� Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty the toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the level indicator lights up.

� Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet waste also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority about disposal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste paper baskets which are situated at car parks.

� Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this purpose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of rubbish on board.

� When parked, do not allow the engine to run more than necessary. When running idle, a cold engine releases more contaminants than usual. The running temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Page 17: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

17Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Introduction 2

� Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can also be biologically degraded and only use small doses.

� When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for parking areas which are specially reserved for motorhomes. Enquire at the town or community authority about parking spaces.

� Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.

Page 18: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

18 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Introduction2

Page 19: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

19Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Safety 3

3SafetyChapter overviewThis chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are for the protection of persons and property.

The instructions address the following topics:

� fire prevention and what to do in case of fire� general care of the vehicle� road safety of the vehicle� towing� gas system of the vehicle� electrical system of the vehicle� water system of the vehicle

3.1 Fire prevention

3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks

3.1.2 Fire-fighting

3.1.3 In case of fire

� Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.

� Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances.

� Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard!

� Never use portable heating or cooking appliances.

� Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical system, gas system or appliances.

� Always have a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle (with at least 1 kg capacity). The fire extinguisher must be approved, tested and close at hand.

� Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qual-ified personnel. Observe the date of testing.

� The fire extinguisher is not included in the scope of delivery.

� Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.

� Evacuate all passengers.

� Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains.

� Close regulator tap on the gas bottle.

� Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade.

� Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.

� Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits.

� Keep escape routes clear.

� Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.

Page 20: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

20 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Safety3

All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered as emergency exits:

� Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction� Opening angle at least 70°� Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm� Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm

3.2 General

3.3 Road safety

� The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing or the use of the gas cooker or other appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation or mushroom-shaped vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO2 levels.

� Observe the headroom of the doors.

� As far as the fitted appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) and the base vehicle (engine, brakes, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals are authoritative. It is imperative that they be observed.

� Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight and road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in the vehicle papers.

� Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Informa-tion concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and service centres.

� Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.

� If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes, wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight exceeding 4 tonnes.

� When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and windows are closed.

� Carry a hazard warning triangle and a first-aid kit and/or flashing hazard warning light when this is required by law.

� The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which is valid for the respective vehicle class.

� When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle and the fitted appliances.

� Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indi-cating and lighting equipment, the steering and the brakes.

� If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

Page 21: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

21Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Safety 3

� Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.

� Before commencing the journey, secure the hinged pull-down bed to the roof using the retaining belt.

� Before commencing the journey, open and secure the shades on the windscreen and on the driver's and front passenger's windows.

� Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must remain locked in place in the direction of travel.

� Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely.

� Before commencing the journey, place the television console in the alcove to secure it from turning.

� Before commencing the journey, turn the flat screen and the screen holder back to the basic position and slide them in until they lock into place. Close the TV cabinet.

� During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats (see chapter 5). The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.

� Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.

� Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them fastened during the journey.

� It is not permitted to stay in the alcove during the journey.

� Always secure children with the children safety equipment prescribed for the respective height and weight.

� Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child restraint systems.

� The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving technique accordingly.

� When driving through underpasses, tunnels, etc. observe the overall height of the vehicle (refer to the technical data in the vehicle docu-ments).

� In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the journey.

� Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

� Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger of explosion!

� Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger of suffocation!

� Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the vehicle (see chapter 4).

� When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to load luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible gross weight and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents).

Page 22: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

22 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Safety3

3.4 Towing

3.5 Gas system

3.5.1 General instructions

� Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet compartment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrig-erator door securing device.

� Before commencing the journey, lower the table and fix it to the holder on the floor of the vehicle.

� Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights.

� Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.

� Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract the corner steadies or steady legs which are fitted to the vehicle.

� Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position.

� During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten the wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect them at regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated.

� Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over time (see chapter 14).

� When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

� Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci-dent and injury!

� No persons are to be between the motorhome and the trailer during posi-tioning for connecting and detaching.

� Close all gas isolator taps and the regulator tap before commencing the journey and when leaving the vehicle.

� No source of combustion using gas (gas cooker, gas heater, gas boiler, etc.) may be in operation when filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!

� Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-ised specialist workshop.

� Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

� The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. We recommend having the gas pressure regulator checked no later than every 10 years.

� In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.

� If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).

Page 23: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

23Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Safety 3

3.5.2 Gas bottles

� Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.

� Open a skylight before taking open sources of combustion (gas cooker) into service.

� Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.

� If the vehicle or gas devices are not used, close the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

� If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap.

� Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time.

� The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.

� Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.

� Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.

� Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside.

� Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-proof.

� Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the gas bottle compartment.

� The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.

� Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.

� The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage.

� Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may be allowed to lie against the vehicle. Keep the intake openings under the floor of the vehicle open and clean.

� Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment.

� Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.

� Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.

Page 24: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

24 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Safety3

3.6 Electrical system

3.7 Water system

� If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top.

� Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.

� The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).

� Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements.

� Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 °C.

� Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles! Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve.

� Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles.

� Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

� Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.

� Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices and lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the mains.

� Only use original fuses with the stipulated values.

� Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied.

� Never bridge or repair fuses.

� Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. For this reason, rinse the water pipes and the water tank thoroughly with several litres of fresh water before each use of the vehicle. To do this, open all water taps. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.

� If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (Truma) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.

Page 25: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

25Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

4Before the journeyChapter overviewThis chapter contains important information which has to be noted before com-mencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey.

The instructions address the following topics:

� keys� registration� calculating the payload� correct loading of the vehicle� towing� retracting and extending the entrance step� PVC-floor covering� storing the television� using snow chains

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the most important points.

4.1 KeysThe following keys are included with your vehicle:

4.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van

Two keys for

� ignition lock� driver's and passenger's doors� fuel tank

Two keys for

� conversion door of the body� fresh water filler neck (only with external fresh water filler neck)� external flaps

Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case of loss.

4.1.2 Model I

Two keys for

� ignition lock

Two keys for

� driver's door� fuel tank� conversion door of the body� fresh water filler neck� external flaps

Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case of loss.

Page 26: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

26 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

4.2 RegistrationYour motorhome is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national reg-ulations on registration.

Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code sticker in addition to the EU plate.

4.3 Payload

On loading, make sure that the payload's centre of gravity is as low as possible (directly above the floor of the vehicle). Otherwise this may affect the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

� Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

� Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with passengers) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.

� Adapt the speed to the payload. The stopping distance is increased if the payload is high.

� Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle documents by the payload.

� Built-in accessories, special equipment, the full water tank and the gas bot-tles all reduce the payload.

� Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.

Description Load (kg)

Maximum permittedpayloads

Motorhome roof rack 75

Bike rack Triple 50

Quadruple 60

Motorcycle rack 100

Sliding drawer 40

Rear garage and rear storage space (A5831) 150

Rear garage and rear storage space (A5881, A6971, A6981, A6991, A7071)

250

Rear garage and rear storage space (all other models) 200

Overcab bed 200

Pull-down bed model I 200

Rear bed 200

Bunk beds 100

Folding beds 50

Page 27: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

27Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

4.3.1 Terms

Maximum permissiblegross weight in a laden

condition

The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that a vehicle may never exceed.

The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload.

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum per-missible gross weight in a laden condition.

Mass in ready-to-drivecondition

The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive standard vehicle.

The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:

� Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard equipment

� Driver's weight� Basic equipment weight

Unladen weight includes lubricants such as oils and coolants which have been filled, the on-board tool set, the spare wheel and a filled fuel tank.

75 kg are calculated for the weight of the driver, regardless of how much the driver really weighs.

Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:

� Water system filled up to 90 % (water tank and pipes)� Gas bottles filled up to 90 %� A full heating system� A full toilet flushing system� The power cables for the 240 V power supply� The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used

The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to-drive conditions.

Payload The payload is made up as follows:

� Conventional load� Additional equipment� Personal equipment

� Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight". However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for fixed formulations.

� All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1646-2.

Example for calculatingthe basic equipment

Water tank with 100 l 100 kg

Gas bottles (2 x 11 kg gas + 2 x 14 kg bottle) + 50 kg

Boiler with 10 l + 10 kg

240 V power cable + 4 kg

Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg

Total = 184 kg

Page 28: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

28 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the following text.

Conventional load The conventional load is the weight specified by the manufacturer for the pas-sengers.

Conventional load means: 75 kg are calculated for every seat specified by the manufacturer, regardless of how much the passengers actually weigh. The driver's seat is already included as part of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and must not be calculated as part of the conventional load.

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the number of seats.

Additional equipment Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples of additional equipment include:

� Caravan coupling� Roof rail� Awning� Bike or motorcycle rack� Satellite unit� Microwave oven

Chapter 16 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they may also be obtained from the manufacturer.

Personal equipment Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in the conventional load or in the additional equipment. For example, personal equipment can include the following:

� Foodstuffs� Crockery� Television� Radio� Clothes� Bedding� Toys� Books� Toiletries

No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:

� Animals� Bikes� Boats� Surfboards� Sports equipment

For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the man-ufacturer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the fol-lowing formula:

Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L

Explanation N = maximum number of people including the driver, as stated by the manu-facturerL = total length of the vehicle in metres

Page 29: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

29Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

4.3.2 Calculating the payload

The payload (see section 4.3.1) is the difference in weight between

� Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and� Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.

The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum per-missible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manu-facturer in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value.

Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks (fuel and water), full gas bottles and complete additional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual payload be determined.

To do this, proceed as follows:

� First only drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the front wheels and have it weighed.

� Then drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the back wheels and have it weighed.

The individual values give the current axle loads. These are important for the correct loading of the vehicle (see section 4.3.3). The sum of these values is the current weight of the vehicle.

The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight.

This can be used to determine the weight that remains for the personal equip-ment:

� Determine the weight of the passengers and subtract it from the value for the actual payload.

� The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive weights. For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition must not be exceeded.

� Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with passengers) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.

Mass in kg to be calculated

Calculation

Example for calculatingthe payload

Maximum permissible gross weight ac-cording to vehicle documents

3500

Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condi-tion, including basic equipment according to vehicle documents

- 3070

This results in a permissible payload of

430

Conventional load e.g.: 3 persons each weighing 75 kg

- 225

Additional equipment - 40

For the personal equipment this re-sults in

= 165

Page 30: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

30 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal equipment.

4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly

Large storage spaces, such as the rear garage, also have room for heavy objects (e.g. motorcycle). This might mean that the axle load on the rear axle is exceeded.

However, the individual axles may not be overloaded under any circum-stances. That is why it is important, at which distance to the axles the load is stored.

To distribute the load correctly, you will need a scale, a tape measure, a cal-culator and some time.

Two simple formulas are needed to calculate the effect of the weight of the load on the axles:

Formulas A x G : R = weight on the rear axle

Weight on the rear axle – G = weight on the front axle

Explanation A = distance between storage compartment and front axle in cmG = weight of the load in the storage compartment in kgR = wheelbase of the vehicle (distance between axles) in cm

� For safety reasons, never exceed the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition.

� Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle.

� Distribute the load evenly on both axles. In doing so, observe the axle loads specified in the vehicle documents. Observe the permissible load-carrying capacity of the tyres (see chapter 14).

� Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg-atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.

� Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip.

� Store heavy objects (tent poles, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles.

Low-lying storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direc-tion of travel and underfloor storage compartments or storage compart-ments in the double floor are particularly suited for storing heavy objects.

� Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets.

� Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).

� Measure the external distances horizontally from the centre of the front wheel to the centre of the storage compartment or to the centre of the back wheel.

Page 31: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

31Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

Calculating axle loads: � Multiply the distance between storage compartment and front axle (A) with the weight of the load in the storage compartment (G) and divide the result by the wheelbase (R). The result is the weight of the load in the storage compartment on the rear axle. Make a note of this weight and of the storage compartment.

� In a second step, subtract the weight in the storage compartment (G) from the weight calculated beforehand. If the result is a positive value (example 1), this means that the load on the front axle is reduced by this value. If the result is a negative value (example 2), this means that the load on the front axle is increased. Make a note of this value, too.

� Calculate all storage compartments of the vehicle in the same way.

� In a last step, add all weights calculated for the rear axle to the rear axle load and add (or subtract) all weights calculated for the front axle to (from) the front axle load.How to determine rear axle load and front axle load is described in section 4.3.2.

If the calculated value exceeds the permissible axle load, the load must be dis-tributed in a different way.

If the load on the front axle is too low, the grip of the tyres on the road is reduced (traction). This applies in particular to vehicles with front wheel drive. In this case, the load must be redistributed, too.

4.3.4 Roof load

Example 1 Example 2

Example calculation Distance to the front axle A (A1) 450 (cm) (A2) 250 (cm)

Weight in the storage compartment G x 100 (kg) x 50 (kg)

Wheelbase of the vehicle R ÷ 325 (cm) ÷ 325 (cm)

Load on the rear axle(add to the axle load)

138.5 (kg) 38.5 (kg)

Weight in the storage compartment - 100 (kg) - 50 (kg)

Load relief to the front axle(subtract from the axle load)

38.5 (kg)

Load on the front axle(add to the axle load)

-11.5 (kg)

� Access the roof only when a roof rail has been fitted. Always use the ladder at the rear to climb onto the roof.

� Take care when stepping onto the ladder. There is danger of slipping when the ladder is moist or icy.

� Take care when stepping onto the roof. There is danger of slipping when the roof is moist or icy.

� Do not overload the roof. Road behaviour and brake reaction deteriorate as the roof load increases.

� If the vehicle is equipped with a roof rail, load racks can be mounted on the roof rail for roof loads (e.g. for surfboards, rubber boats or light canoes). Special girder systems are available as accessory. Your Dethleffs dealer will be pleased to advise you.

� The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.

Page 32: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

32 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

Rear ladder

Folding downwards: � Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock (Fig. 1,1) and turn it a quarter turn until the key is in a vertical position.

� Hold the foldable part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,4) and swing out the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5).

� Pull out the key and fold the rear ladder downwards.

Folding upwards: � Fold the rear ladder upwards and hold it firmly.

� Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock (Fig. 1,1).

� Swivel the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5) inward around the tube of the fixed part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,3).

� Turn the key a quarter turn until it is in a horizontal position.

� Check the rear ladder lock: Slightly pull on the rear ladder.

4.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space

� The vehicle roof is not suitable for localised load. Before stepping on to the roof, extensively cover the area you will be treading on. Materials with a smooth or soft surface are suitable, for example, a thick polystyrene panel.

� Secure roof loads with tension belts. Do not use rubber expanders.

� Observe the overall height of the vehicle when the roof rack is loaded.

� The driver's cabin should have a clearly visible notice stating the overall height. This eliminates the need for calculations at bridges and thorough-fares.

Fig. 1 Rear ladder lock

� Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the rear garage/the rear storage space.

� Depending on the model, the maximum permissible load for the rear garage / rear storage space is between 150 kg and 250 kg. Do not exceed the permissible rear axle load.

� Observe: If the rear garage or (depending on the model) the rear storage space is loaded to its maximum capacity, this will reduce the load on the front axle due to the levering action. The driving quality is impaired.

Page 33: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

33Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

Moving the clampingeyelets:

� Turn the clamping eyelet (Fig. 2,1) half a turn in an anticlockwise direction.

� Push the clamping eyelet into the clamping rail (Fig. 2,2) to the desired position.

� Give clamping eyelet one half turn in a clockwise direction. The clamping eyelet sits tightly in the clamping rail again.

� Check that the clamping eyelet is tight.

4.3.6 Double floor

4.3.7 Sliding drawer

� Depending on the vehicle equipment, clamping rails with clamping eyelets are mounted in the rear garage or in the rear storage space. Always secure loads onto the clamping eyelets. Always use tightening straps or lashing nets for securing the load, never rubber expanders.

� When clamping loads, always check that the clamping eyelets are placed tightly in the clamping rails. If the clamping eyelet is not anchored tightly in the clamping rail, the load may slide or loosen during forcible movements of the steering wheel or when braking.

� Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of the floor covering.

Fig. 2 Clamping eyelets rear garage

1 Clamping eyelet2 Clamping rail

� Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the double floor.

� Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of the floor covering.

� Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.

Page 34: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

34 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

4.3.8 Bike rack

Loading the bike rack withbicycles

When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity of the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The bike rack should always be loaded from the inside to the outside.

Loading the bike rack correctly:

� Fold the bike rack downwards.

� Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall.

� Place the lightest bicycles in the centre or on the outside of the bike rack.

� Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps on the bike rack.

� In addition, fasten the outermost bicycle on the retaining bracket or retaining arm.

If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as possible to the rear wall.

4.4 Towing

� Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the bike rack.

� Bicycles may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle. Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly.

� Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).

� Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the first 10 km and then at each break in the journey.

� The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered.

� Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted.

� Before every journey, check:

Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly?

Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack belts?

� No persons are to be between the motorhome and the trailer during posi-tioning for connecting and detaching.

� Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the motorhome. Nose weight and rear axle load must not be exceeded. The values of the nose weight and rear axle load are included in the docu-ments of the vehicle and the caravan coupling.

� Trailer with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach trailer with the overrun brake on.

� Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted incorrectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the instruction manual for the caravan coupling.

Page 35: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

35Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

4.5 Entrance step

4.5.1 Mechanically operated entrance step

Pulling out: � Pull the entrance step forwards (Fig. 3,2) until it latches into place.

Pushing in: � Slightly lift the entrance step (Fig. 3,1).

� Push the entrance step as far as it will go under the base of the vehicle (Fig. 3,3). Ensure that the entrance step latches in place (Fig. 3,4).

4.5.2 Electrically operated entrance step

� Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.

� Do not stand in the direct range of the entrance step while it is being retracted or extended.

� Do not step on the entrance step until it has extended completely. There is a risk of injury.

� Do not under any circumstances raise or lower persons or loads with the entrance step.

� Take note of the different step heights and make certain that the ground is firm and even when exiting.

� Do not grease or lubricate the pivot bearing and joints of the entrance step (see chapter 12).

� If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place, a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.

Fig. 3 Mechanically operated entrance step

� If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place, a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.

� Follow the warning notice on the entrance step.

Page 36: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

36 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

Before stepping on the entrance step, fully extend it (Fig. 4).

Operating switch The switch to operate the entrance step is located on the inside of the vehicle in the area of the conversion door.

Extending: � Press the rocker switch (Fig. 5,1) down until the entrance step has extended completely.

Retracting: � Press the rocker switch (Fig. 5,1) up until the entrance step has retracted completely.

Emergency operation If the electric drive of the entrance step fails, follow the directions below to manually retract the entrance step:

� Pull out the securing splint from the connection to the engine.

� Release the rectangular connection to the engine using a suitable object (e.g. a screwdriver).

� Push in the entrance step by hand and secure it using a suitable device (e.g. a string).

� Contact customer service.

4.6 PVC-floor covering

Fig. 4 Warning notice for entrance step

Fig. 5 Operating switch entrance step

� Shoes with pointed heels can leave permanent impressions in the PVC-floor covering. Never wear shoes with pointed heels in the vehicle.

� Rubber mats or long exposure to ketchup, carrot juice, ink, blood or lipstick can discolour the PVC-floor covering. If possible, remove stains from the floor immediately.

Page 37: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

37Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

4.7 Television

Storing the television in theTV cabinet:

� Rotate the television to its initial position (Fig. 6) and lock it into place.

� Use handle (Fig. 6,1) to push the holder for the flat screen backwards. The latch (Fig. 6,2) will engage.

� Close TV cabinet.

4.8 Snow chains

The use of snow chains is subject to the legal regulations of the individual countries.

� Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely.

� Before commencing the journey, turn the flat screen and the screen holder back to the basic position and slide them in until they lock into place. Close the TV cabinet.

� Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-tion. Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points towards the back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.

� Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from chapter 7.

Fig. 6 Television (flat screen) Fig. 7 Alternative: Television (flat screen)

� Only mount snow chains if there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between the tyres and the vehicle body.

� When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

� Observe the fitting instructions issued by the manufacturer of the snow chains.

� Only use snow chains approved by the manufacturer.

� Do not fit snow chains on alloy wheel rims.

� If the drive axle of the vehicle has twin tyres (2 tyres next to each other), mount the the snow chains to the outer tyres.

� For vehicles manufactured by Ford with front-wheel drive: Snow chains are only permitted if tyres of the size 195/75 R16 are mounted.

Page 38: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

38 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

� Always mount snow chains to the drive wheels.� After a few metres, check the tension of the snow chains.

4.9 Road safety

Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:

� Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

No. Checks Checked

Base vehicle 1 All vehicle documents are on board

2 Tyres in proper condition

3 Vehicle lighting, brake lights and reversing lights function

4 Oil levels for engine, gearbox and power steering controlled

5 Coolant and fluid for windscreen washers filled up

6 Brakes function

7 Brakes react evenly

8 When braking, the vehicle remains in the lane

Housing body, outside 9 Awning completely retracted

10 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)

11 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away

12 External supports removed

13 Fitted steady legs retracted and fixed in place

14 Wheel chocks removed and stored away

15 Entrance step retracted (observe warning tone)

16 External flaps closed and locked

17 Conversion door locked

18 Overall height of the vehicle including roof rack when loaded measured and noted. Keep the height information close at hand in the driver's cabin

Housing body, inside 19 Windows and skylights closed and locked

20 Television secured in the TV cabinet or removed from the sup-port and stored securely

21 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)

22 Loose parts stored away or fixed in position

23 Open storage spaces empty

24 No gas cartridges or other easily flammable materials stored in the roof cupboard of the awning light

25 Refrigerator door secured

26 Refrigerator set to 12 V operation

27 All drawers and flaps closed

Page 39: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

39Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey 4

28 Living area doors and sliding doors secured

29 Pull-down bed fixed to roof with retaining belt pulled tight

30 Swivel seat locking device for driver's seat and front passen-ger's seat locked

31 Children's seats mounted to seats with three-point safety belts

32 Shades in the driver's cabin opened and secured

Gas system 33 Gas bottles firmly fixed in the gas bottle compartment so that they are unable to turn

34 Protective cap set on top of the gas bottle

35 Regulator tap on the gas bottle and gas isolator taps are closed

Electrical system 36 Check the battery voltage of the starter and living area battery (see chapter 9). If the panel indicates that the battery voltage is too low, the respective battery will need to be recharged. Observe the notes and instructions in chapter 9

� Commence journey with fully charged starter and living area batteries.

No. Checks Checked

Page 40: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

40 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Before the journey4

Page 41: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

41Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey 5

5During the journeyChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions on how to drive the motorhome.

The instructions address the following topics:

� driving speed� brakes� seat belts� seats and headrests� the backrest adjustment mechanism for the bench� seating arrangement� branch block� electrical window winders� electrically adjustable external mirrors� Roman shades in the driver's cabin� writing and reading rest� bonnet� windscreen washer fluid container� checking the oil level� filling the tank

5.1 Driving the motorhome

� The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving technique accordingly.

� Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.

� During the journey, seat belts should always be worn at the seats that have seat belts mounted.

� Never open your seat belts when travelling.

� Passengers must remain in the seats provided.

� The doors must remain locked.

� Avoid braking with a jerk.

� If a navigation system is used, only change the destination when the vehicle is stationary. Drive to a car park or stop in a safe area when changing the destination.

� Do not play DVDs using the monitor of the navigation system during the journey.

� Drive slowly on poor roads.

� Take extreme care when driving onto ferries, crossing uneven roads and driving in reverse. Because of the relatively large overhang, larger vehicles might swing out and "touch ground" in unfavourable conditions. This can cause damage to the underbody or to parts fitted there.

� If an accident occurs as a result of these instructions not being observed, Dethleffs will not be held responsible for damages caused.

� The safety measures stipulated in chapter 3 have to be observed.

� If a reversing camera is installed in the vehicle, the camera is automatically switched on when driving in reverse gear.

Page 42: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

42 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey5

5.2 Driving speed

5.3 Brakes

Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:

� Do the brakes function?� Do the brakes react evenly?� Does the vehicle remain in the lane when braking?

5.4 Seat beltsDepending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point safety and/or lap belts in the living area. National regulations apply seat-belt fastening.

� The vehicle is equipped with a powerful engine. This means there are sufficient reserves in difficult traffic situations. This high power enables a high maximum speed and requires above-average driving ability.

� The vehicle provides a large contact surface for wind. A sudden cross-wind can be especially dangerous.

� Uneven or one-sided loading affects road performance.

� Driving on unknown streets, you may encounter hazardous road condi-tions and unexpected driving situations. Therefore, in the interest of safety, make sure your driving speed is appropriate to any given driving situation and environment.

� Adhere to the national legal speed limits.

� Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-ised specialist workshop.

� Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unserviceable.

� Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them fastened during the journey.

� Do not damage or trap belts. Have damaged seat belts changed by an authorised specialist workshop.

� Do not alter the belt fixing devices, automatic seat belt winders and the belt clips.

� Inspect the screwed connections of the seat belts from time to time in order to ensure that they are correctly seated.

� Only use one seat belt for one adult person.

� Do not belt in objects together with persons.

� Seat belts are not sufficient for persons who are less than 150 cm tall. In these cases use additional restraining devices. Observe test certificate.

� Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child restraint systems.

Page 43: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

43Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey 5

5.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly

The seat belt is fastened correctly when a fist can be passed between the body and the seat belt.

5.5 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat

5.5.1 Seats (Aguti)

Rotating seats intodriving position

The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-tion in the direction of travel.

� Push both armrests upward.

� Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central position.

� Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.

� After an accident, replace the seat belts.

� During the journey, do not tilt the backrest too far backwards. Otherwise the functionality of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed.

� Do not twist the belt. The belt must be positioned smoothly against the body.

� When fastening the seat belt, adopt the correct sitting position.

� Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position.

� The seats must remain fixed in position during the journey and are not to be rotated.

� The driver's and front passenger's seat are a part of the base vehicle, depending on model and vehicle equipment. In this case the adjustment of the seats is described in the operating instructions of the base vehicle.

Fig. 8 Driver's and front passenger's seats (Aguti)

1 Lengthways adjustment2 Armrest adjustment3 Rotating4 Backrest adjustment mechanism

� Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.

Page 44: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

44 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey5

Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.

� Turn the knurled wheel (Fig. 8,2) in an anticlockwise direction (when viewed from the front). The latch of the armrest is released by this.

� Move the armrest to the desired position.

� Turn the knurled wheel as far as possible in a clockwise direction.

Adjusting an appropriateseating position

The position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can be adjusted. The handles which are required for this purpose are positioned to the front, right or left of the seat.

� Pull the handle (Fig. 8,1). The seat can be moved forward or backward.

� Turn the knurled knob (Fig. 8,4). The angle of the backrest can be adjusted.

5.5.2 Seats (ISRI)

Rotating seats intodriving position

The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-tion in the direction of travel.

� Push both armrests upward.

� Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central position.

� Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.

Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.

� For ease in handling, first move the armrest slightly upward.

� For fine adjustments, turn the handwheel (Fig. 9,1) upwards or downwards.

Fig. 9 Driver's and front passenger's seats (ISRI)

1 Armrest adjustment2 Lengthways adjustment3 Height adjustment4 Rotating5 Backrest adjustment mechanism

� Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.

Page 45: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

45Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey 5

Adjusting an appropriateseating position

Both the height and the position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can be adjusted. The handles which are required for this purpose are positioned to the front, right or left of the seat.

� Pull the handle (Fig. 9,2). The seat can be moved forward or backward.

� Pull the handle (Fig. 9,5). The angle of the backrest can be adjusted.

� Pull the handle (Fig. 9,3). The seat can be lifted or lowered toward the front.

5.6 Headrests

Before commencing the journey, adjust the headrests (Fig. 10,1) so that the back of the head is supported at approximately ear height. Push the headrests upwards or downwards by hand.

� The backrest is under strong spring tension. If there is no resistance to the backrest, it quickly moves forward after unlocking.

� If the backrest quickly moves forward uncontrolled it can damage the seat-belt lock.

� The headrests are not adjustable for all models.

Fig. 10 Bench with adjustable head-rests

Page 46: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

46 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey5

5.7 Backrest adjustment mechanism for bench The inclination of the backrest can be adjusted with the backrest adjustment mechanism "Travel Lounge".

� Pull or press the bar (Fig. 11,1) under the seat (Fig. 11,3) upwards and hold it in this position.

� Push the seat on the rails (Fig. 11,2) to the desired position or carefully pull it forwards as far as it will go.

� Let go of the bar and move the seat forwards or backwards slightly until the seat can be heard to lock into place.

5.8 Seating arrangement

Seats which may be used during travel are equipped with a sticker (Fig. 12).

� If the vehicle is equipped with the backrest adjustment, the bench cannot be converted into a bed.

Fig. 11 Backrest adjustment mecha-nism for bench

� During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats. The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.

� During the journey sitting on the divans is not permitted.

� Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.

Fig. 12 "Seat" symbol

Page 47: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

47Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey 5

5.9 Branch block (model I)

The sliding regulator (Fig. 13,2) for the branch block (Fig. 13,1) is located on the outside left of the dashboard.

Vehicle heating is coupled with room heater by the sliding regulator. Therefore the windscreen is heated when the vehicle is at a standstill.

During mobile operation, close the branch block (slide the sliding regulator all the way down) so that the complete power of the vehicle heater can reach to the front and side panes.

5.10 Electrical window winders (model I)

There is an electrical window winder (Fig. 14) on the driver's side of the vehicle.

Opening: � Press lower part of the switch (Fig. 14,2).

Closing: � Press upper part of the switch (Fig. 14,1).

Fig. 13 Branch block

� Remove hands and other objects from the window before closing.

� Even if you leave your vehicle just briefly, remove the ignition key from the steering lock. Otherwise children may be able to operate the window winder and injure themselves.

Fig. 14 Switch for electrical window winder

Page 48: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

48 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey5

5.11 Electrically adjustable external mirrors (model I)Depending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with two electrically adjust-able and heated external mirrors. The switches for external mirror adjustment and the mirror heater are on the dashboard.

Adjusting: � Select the mirror to be adjusted. To do so, turn the rotary switch (Fig. 15,1) to the left or right.

� Adjust the mirror by pressing the switch (Fig. 15,1) in the appropriate direc-tion.

Switching on the heater: � Press the switch (Fig. 15,2). The switch indicator lamp shows it is in oper-ation.

5.12 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and front passenger's window

Securing the Roman shadefor the windscreen:

� Use the handle (Fig. 16,2 and Fig. 17,1) to pull the two halves of the Roman shade for the windscreen outwards as far as they will go.

� Push the locking knobs (Fig. 16,1) upward or downward. If the red dot is visible, the lock is open.

Fig. 15 Switch for electrically adjust-able external mirrors and mirror heater

� While travelling, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window and front passenger's window must be open, in a fixed position and secured.

Fig. 16 Lock for the Roman shade of the windscreen

Fig. 17 Lock for the Roman shade of the windscreen (model I)

Page 49: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

49Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey 5

Securing the Roman shadefor the driver's / frontpassenger's window:

� On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the handle (Fig. 18,1) onto the cap. The Roman shade is secured.

5.13 Writing and reading rest

Depending on the model, the motorhome is equipped with a writing and reading rest (Fig. 19).

5.14 Bonnet

Fig. 18 Locking mechanism for Roman shades on driver's/front pas-senger's windows

� During the journey the writing and reading rest must be closed.

� If there is a passenger airbag, the writing and reading rest is locked so it cannot be opened.

Fig. 19 Writing and reading rest

� When the bonnet is open, there is a risk of injury in the engine compart-ment.

� Even if the engine was switched off some time ago, it might still be hot. Danger of burns!

� Do not work in the engine compartment while the engine is running.

� The bonnet must be kept firmly closed and locked during the journey. After closing, check whether the lock has engaged. In order to carry this out, pull on the bonnet.

Page 50: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

50 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey5

5.14.1 Model I

Opening: � Pull the lever (Fig. 20,1) situated on the left-hand side of the vehicle on the dashboard. The bonnet opens as far as the safety hook allows.

� Reach under the bonnet with one hand and actuate the safety hook (Fig. 21,1). Do this by reaching behind the plate (Fig. 21,2) and pulling it forward.

� Move the bonnet in an arch forwards and upwards.

Closing: � Move the bonnet in an arch downwards and backwards until the latch locks audibly in place.

� Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull on the bonnet.

5.14.2 Fortero, Van

Opening: � Insert the ignition key (Fig. 22,3) in the locking cylinder (Fig. 22,1) in the radiator grille (Fig. 22,2).

� Press in the ignition key and turn it one quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction. The bonnet is unlatched.

� Turn the ignition key back in a clockwise direction past the central position. The bonnet is open and swings upward.

� Turn the ignition key back to the central position (Fig. 22) and remove it.

Closing: � Move the bonnet downwards until the catch lock engages audibly.

� Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull on the bonnet.

Fig. 20 Release knob on the inside of the bonnet

Fig. 21 Release knob on the outside of the bonnet

Fig. 22 Bonnet release mechanism Fortero, Van

Page 51: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

51Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey 5

5.15 Filling washer fluid (model I)

� Unlock and open the bonnet.

� Remove the lid (Fig. 23,1) from the filler neck of the washer fluid container.

� Slowly fill in washer fluid.

� Push the lid onto the filler neck of the washer fluid container.

5.16 Checking the oil level (model I)

The oil dipstick (Fig. 24,1) is located behind the front crossbeam. The oil dip-stick is marked in red.

Fig. 23 Washer fluid container filler neck

Fig. 24 Oil dipstick (I model)

1 Oil dipstick

Page 52: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

52 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

During the journey5

5.17 Filling up with diesel

The fuel filler neck is situated on the exterior of the vehicle, at the front left.

Opening: � Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 25,1) and turn it in an anticlock-wise direction.

� Remove cap.

Closing: � Place the cap on the fuel filler neck.

� Turn key in a clockwise direction.

� Remove the key.

� Check that the cap is fastened securely on the fuel filler neck.

� No source of combustion using gas (gas cooker, gas heater, gas boiler, etc.) may be in operation when filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!

� The cap for the fuel filler neck and for the fresh water filler neck are very similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.

� The fuel filler neck is labelled with the word "Diesel".

Fig. 25 Cap for the fuel filler neck

Page 53: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

53Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Pitching the motorhome 6

6Pitching the motorhomeChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� handbrake� entrance step� wheel chocks� operation of the supports� 240 V connection� refrigerator

6.1 HandbrakeFirmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.

6.2 Entrance stepIn order to exit the vehicle, first fully extend the entrance step.

6.3 Wheel chocksIf the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes, wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight exceeding 4 tonnes.

6.4 Supports

6.4.1 General instructions

� Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling.

� Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the vehicle. To prevent this from happening, regularly check the vehicle for damages or animal traces after pitching.

� If there is any risk of frost, release the handbrake every now and then and apply it again. This will prevent it from freezing or rusting. Prior to releasing the handbrake, secure the vehicle so that is cannot roll away.

� Do not use the fitted supports as a vehicle jack. They supports are only for stabilising the parked vehicle to prevent the rear axle from bottoming out.

� When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the supports are evenly loaded.

� Before driving away, wind up the supports as far as they can go, fully retract and secure them.

� When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order to prevent the vehicle from sinking into the ground.

Page 54: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

54 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Pitching the motorhome6

6.4.2 Steady legs (Sawiko)

In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of the steady legs regularly.

The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.

Extending: � Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 26,1) and rotate until the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.

� If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 26,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 26,5).

� Pull out the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.

� Insert the splint in the support foot extension.

� Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.

Retracting: � Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 26,1) and rotate until the steady leg is clear of the ground.

� If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 26,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 26,5).

� Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 26,5) and insert the splint (Fig. 26,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension.

� Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 26,1) until the steady leg has swung upwards and the guide (Fig. 26,2) has reached the very end of the slot (Fig. 26,3).

� Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used to bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for turning.

Fig. 26 Steady leg

� Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the splint?

Page 55: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

55Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Pitching the motorhome 6

6.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO)

In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of the steady legs regularly.

The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.

Extending: � Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 27,1) and rotate until the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.

� Remove the splint (Fig. 27,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 27,5).

� Extend the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.

� Insert the splint in the support foot extension.

� Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.

Retracting: � Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 27,1) and rotate until the steady leg is clear of the ground.

� Remove the splint (Fig. 27,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 27,5).

� Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 27,5) and insert the splint (Fig. 27,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension.

� Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 27,1) with the socket spanner until the steady leg has swung upwards and the guide disc (Fig. 27,3) has com-pletely retracted into the notch (Fig. 27,2).

6.5 240 V connectionThe vehicle can be connected to a 240 V power supply (see chapter 9).

6.6 RefrigeratorThe 12 V operation of the refrigerator is only possible when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is switched off, switch the refrigerator to 240 V operation or gas operation.

� Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used to bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for turning.

Fig. 27 Steady leg

� Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the splint?

Page 56: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

56 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Pitching the motorhome6

Page 57: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

57Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7LivingChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� opening and closing the doors and external flaps� ventilation of the vehicle� opening and closing the windows and blinds� opening and closing the skylights� rotating the seats� modifying the table surfaces� converting tables� positioning the television� adjusting the halogen spotlights� light switches� extending the seating groups� use of the beds

7.1 Doors

7.1.1 Conversion door, outside

Opening: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 28,1) and turn until the door lock is unlatched.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

� Pull on the handle (Fig. 28,2). The door is open.

� Only drive with locked doors.

� Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g. during an accident.

� Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights. However, in an emergency, locked doors make it more difficult for helpers to enter the vehicle.

� When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.

� Depending on the model, the locks of the driver's and the front passenger's doors are part of the base vehicle. In this case, the opening and closing of the driver's door and the front passenger's door is described in the oper-ating manual of the base vehicle.

Fig. 28 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Page 58: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

58 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Locking: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 28,1) and turn until the door lock is engaged.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (with recessed handle)

Opening: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 29,1) and turn until the door lock is unlatched.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

� Pull on the handle (Fig. 29,2). The door is open.

Locking: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 29,1) and turn until the door lock is engaged.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

7.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal)

Opening: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 30,2) and turn until the door lock is unlatched.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

� Pull on the handle (Fig. 30,1). The door is open.

Locking: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 30,2) and turn until the door lock is engaged.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

Fig. 29 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Fig. 30 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Page 59: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

59Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob)

Opening: � Turn the knob in an anticlockwise direction (Fig. 31,1). The door lock is unlatched.

Locking: � Turn the door knob approx. 45° in a clockwise direction (Fig. 31,2) and leave in this position (Fig. 32).

7.1.5 Conversion door, inside (with locking lever)

Opening: � Pull on the handle (Fig. 33,1). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever (Fig. 33,2) jumps out automatically.

Locking: � Press the locking lever (Fig. 33,2).

Fig. 31 Door lock of conversion door, inside, open

Fig. 32 Door lock of conversion door, inside, locked

Fig. 33 Door lock of conversion door, inside

Page 60: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

60 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal)

Opening: � Pull on the handle (Fig. 34,1). The door lock is unlatched.

Locking: � Turn the safety knob (Fig. 34,2) in a clockwise direction.

7.1.7 Driver's door, outside

Opening: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,1) and turn until the door lock is unlatched.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

� Pull on the handle (Fig. 35,2). The door is open.

Locking: � Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,1) and turn until the door lock is engaged.

� Return the key to the central position and remove it.

Fig. 34 Door lock of conversion door, inside

Fig. 35 Door lock of driver's door, out-side

Page 61: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

61Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.1.8 Driver's door, inside

Opening: � Pull on the handle (Fig. 36,2). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever (Fig. 36,1) jumps out automatically.

Locking: � Press the locking lever (Fig. 36,1).

7.1.9 Insect screen door, can be folded out

An insect screen door is integrated in the conversion door. The insect screen door can be opened outward. In the process the conversion door stays open.

Extending: � Fully open the conversion door and fix to the exterior wall.

� Depending on the model, turn the latch (Fig. 37,1 or Fig. 38,3) a quarter turn or push it back.

� Open the insect screen door.

� Push rail (Fig. 38,1) in the direction of the arrow for stabilisation.

� Fully close insect screen door and push latch (Fig. 38,3) in the direction of the arrow.

Retracting: � Unlatch insect screen door. To do this, push the latch (Fig. 38,3) in the opposite direction of the arrow.

� Open insect screen door.

� Push rail (Fig. 38,1) in the opposite direction of the arrow.

� Fold in the insect screen door. The latching (Fig. 38,2) engages.

� Press the insect screen door on the conversion door and, depending on the model, (Fig. 37,1 or Fig. 38,3) turn the latch one quarter turn or slide it into the holder on the frame.

Fig. 36 Door lock of driver's door, inside

Fig. 37 Insect screen door, closed Fig. 38 Insect screen door, opened out

Page 62: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

62 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.1.10 Insect screen on the conversion door, extendable

Closing: � Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 39,1).

Opening: � Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 39,1).

7.1.11 Window of conversion door (Hartal)

The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.

Closing: � Grasp the Roman shade (Fig. 40,2) using the holding bar (Fig. 40,1), pull it upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will stay at this height.

Opening: � Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the bar and push it down.

� Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.

Fig. 39 Insect screen

Fig. 40 Roman shade

Page 63: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

63Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.2 External flaps

The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylin-ders. Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.

7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle

Opening: � Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 41,1) and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is unlatched.

� Remove the key.

� Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 41,2). The external flap is open.

Closing: � Firmly close the external flap.

� Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is locked.

� Remove the key.

7.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped

� Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.

� To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted to the external flap.

� When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.

� To open the external flap, pull all the lock handles fitted to that particular external flap at the same time.

Fig. 41 Flap lock with recessed handle

� During rain, water can penetrate the opened flap lock. Therefore close the lock handle.

Page 64: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

64 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Opening: � Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 42,1) and turn a quarter turn in an anti-clockwise direction. The lock handle (Fig. 42,2) snaps out.

� Remove the key.

� Turn lock handle one quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction. The flap lock is open.

Closing: � Firmly close the external flap.

� Turn lock handle in a clockwise direction until it is horizontal. The flap lock is now engaged but not locked.

� Insert key into locking cylinder.

� Press down lock handle with key inserted and turn key a quarter turn in a clockwise direction. The lock handle will stay bolted.

� Remove the key.

7.2.3 Sliding drawer

Opening: � Open the flap lock (Fig. 43,2) as described above.

� Pull out the sliding drawer.

� Loosen the tension belts (Fig. 43,1).

Fig. 42 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped, closed

� Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.

� Always fasten the boxes with the tension belts before commencing the journey.

Fig. 43 Sliding drawer

Page 65: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

65Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.3 Ventilation

Condensation Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and efficient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation is not formed during cool weather. During the colder season, a pleasant living cli-mate is created if heating output, air distribution and ventilation are synchro-nized. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dashboard and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation. If the vehicle is laid up for a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, especially in summer as heat accumulation can occur.

7.4 Windows

� The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven-tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO2 levels.

� Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the floor).

� Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. mushroom-shaped vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).

� The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position.

� Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear.

� If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the glass window. The window could be damaged. For that reason, close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight.

� Before commencing the journey, close the windows.

� Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent mois-ture from entering.

� To open and close the hinged window, open or close all catch levers which are fitted to the hinged window.

� When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows.

� In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a light condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The glass is designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the external temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed acrylic glass being damaged by condensation.

Page 66: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

66 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.4.1 Sliding window with lock

Opening: � Pull out the lock (Fig. 44,1).

� Press handle (Fig. 44,2) and push it forward or backward at the same time.

� Open window half up to the required position.

Closing: � Close the window as far as it can go.

� Push in the lock.

7.4.2 Sliding window without lock

Opening: � Press handle (Fig. 45,1) and push or pull it forward or backward at the same time.

� Open window half up to the required position.

Closing: � Close the window as far as possible and let the handle lock in place.

7.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges

Fig. 44 Sliding window with slide lock

Fig. 45 Sliding window

� When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.

Page 67: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

67Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

Opening: � Turn the catch lever (Fig. 46,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.

� Open the hinged window until the required position has been reached and use knurled knob (Fig. 47,1) to secure in position.

The hinged window remains locked in the required position.

Closing: � Turn knurled knob (Fig. 47,1) until the latch is released.

� Close the hinged window.

� Turn the catch lever (Fig. 46,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 46,2) is located on the inside of the window catch (Fig. 46,1).

Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in 2 positions:

� "Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 48) � Firmly closed (Fig. 46)

To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:

� Turn the catch lever (Fig. 48,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.

� Lightly open the hinged window outwards.

� Return the catch lever to its initial position. The locking catch (Fig. 48,2) has to be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 48,1).

During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation" position.

If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win-dows completely.

Fig. 46 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 47 Hinged window with rotary hinges, open

Fig. 48 Catch lever in the "continuous ventilation" position

Page 68: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

68 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.4.4 Hinged window with automatic hinges

Opening: � Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.

� Open the hinged window to the desired latched position. The automatic hinge (Fig. 50,1) locks in place automatically.

The hinged window remains locked in the required position.

Closing: � Open the hinged window as wide as necessary until the latch releases.

� Close the hinged window.

� Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 49,2) is located on the inside of the window catch (Fig. 49,1).

Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:

� "Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 51) � Firmly closed (Fig. 49).

To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:

� Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is not released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of the window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure.

� When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.

Fig. 49 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 50 Hinged window with automatic hinges, open

Fig. 51 Catch lever in the "continuous ventilation" position

Page 69: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

69Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

� Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.

� Lightly open the hinged window outwards.

� Turn the catch lever a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 51,2) has to be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 51,1).

During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation" position.

If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win-dows completely.

7.4.5 Blind and insect screen

The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect screen can be adjusted separately.

Blind The blind is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: � Pull blind at the handle (Fig. 52,2) downwards. If the blind is to be com-pletely closed, it is suspended into the locking devices (Fig. 52,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.

Opening: � If the blind is completely closed: Press handle (Fig. 52,2) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The blind can be taken out of the locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame.

� If the blind is in an intermediate position: Pull the handle (Fig. 52,2) slightly downwards until the locking device releases.

� Use handle to return blind slowly to its initial position.

� Open blinds before commencing the journey. When the blinds are closed, vibrations can damage the spring shaft.

Fig. 52 Hinged window

Page 70: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

70 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: � Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 52,1) down and hang it into the locking devices (Fig. 52,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.

Opening: � Press handle (Fig. 52,1) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The insect screen can be taken out of the locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame.

� Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

7.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen

Roman shade The Roman shade (Fig. 53,3) is permanently connected to the insect screen (Fig. 53,1).

Closing: � Hold the Roman shade in the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 53,4) and care-fully draw it downwards.

� Release the Roman shade at the desired position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: � Slowly return the Roman shade to its initial position with the bottom rod (Fig. 53,4).

Insect screen The insect screen is permanently connected to the Roman shade. When the insect screen is opened, the Roman shade is opened along with it.

Closing: � Hold the insect screen at the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 53,2) and care-fully pull it downward as far as it goes.

Opening: � Slowly return the insect screen on the bottom rod of the Roman shade (Fig. 53,4).

Fig. 53 Sunroof

Page 71: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

71Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and front passenger's window

Closing: � On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs (Fig. 54,1) upwards or downwards. If the red dot is visible, the lock is open.

� Grasp the handle (Fig. 54,2 and Fig. 55,2) of the Roman shades and draw carefully until the magnetic catch keeps the Roman shades closed.

Opening: � Using the handle, carefully push back the Roman shades.

� On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs upwards or downwards. As long as the red dot is visible, the lock is open.

� On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the handle (Fig. 55,2) onto the cap (Fig. 55,1). The Roman shade is secured.

7.5 SkylightsDepending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted to the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced venti-lation is performed using mushroom-shaped vents.

Fig. 54 Roman shade for the wind-screen

Fig. 55 Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window

� The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.

� The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position.

� Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear.

� If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight slightly or move it to ventilation position.

Page 72: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

72 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1)

Depending on the model, there is a skylight built in with forced ventilation (Fig. 56,1) in the living area and in the toilet compartment.

The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.

Opening: � Pull on the handle (Fig. 57,2).

� Fold insect screen (Fig. 57,1) downward.

� Push the spring-loaded latch (Fig. 58,2) towards the inside of the skylight. At the same time use the handle (Fig. 58,1) to press the skylight upwards.

� Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 57,1) until it latches in place.

Closing: � Pull on the handle (Fig. 57,2).

� Fold insect screen (Fig. 57,1) downward.

� Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent mois-ture from entering.

� Do not climb on the skylights.

� Before commencing the journey, close the skylights.

� Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and locked.

� Before commencing the journey, open the blinds or Roman shades.

� Apply talc to the rubber seals of the skylights at least once a year.

� When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.

Fig. 56 Forced ventilation

Fig. 57 Insect screen Fig. 58 Skylight, handle

Page 73: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

73Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

� Using both handles (Fig. 58,1), pull down the skylight with force until the two snap latches lock into place.

� Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 57,1) until it latches in place.

Blind To close and open the blind:

Closing: � Pull the blind (Fig. 59,1) using the handle (Fig. 59,2) and hook the hooks (Fig. 59,3) in the opening (Fig. 59,4).

Opening: � Pull the hooks (Fig. 59,3) out of the opening (Fig. 59,4) and guide the blind back.

7.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2)

The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.

Opening: � Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 60,2) with the handle (Fig. 60,1). The insect screen folds down.

� Press the skylight up using both handles (Fig. 60,3).

� Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 60,4).

Closing: � Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 60,2) with the handle (Fig. 60,1). The insect screen folds down.

� Pull down the skylight with force using both handles (Fig. 60,3).

� Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 60,4).

Fig. 59 Blind

Fig. 60 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2)

Page 74: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

74 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.5.3 Hinged skylight

The hinged skylight may be opened on one side only. Three inclination angles and a ventilation position are available.

An extension hook is included as standard equipment.

Opening: � Turn the lever (Fig. 61,1 or Fig. 62,3) one quarter turn.

� Grip lever and push hinged skylight upwards.

Closing: � Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.

� Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 61,4) must slide into the lower aperture (Fig. 61,3).

Locking in the ventilationposition:

� Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.

� Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 61,4) must slide into the upper aperture (Fig. 61,2).

Roman shade The Roman shade may be closed at any position, either with the hinged sky-light open or closed.

Closing: � Pull out Roman shade (Fig. 62,1) and release in the required position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: � Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen

Closing: � Pull insect screen (Fig. 62,2) out until it engages with the latch on the oppo-site side.

Opening: � Slightly push up insect screen along the strip. The latch is released.

� Slowly return insect screen into its initial position.

Fig. 61 Hinged skylight, lock Fig. 62 Hinged skylight

� If it rains and the hinged skylight is in ventilation position, that could lead to water penetrating the living area. Therefore close hinged skylight com-pletely.

� The insect screen may be damaged if it is closed with the hinged skylight closed. Therefore only close the insect screen when the hinged skylight is open.

Page 75: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

75Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.5.4 Heki skylight (mini and midi)

The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.

Opening: � Press the safety knob (Fig. 63,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 63,1) down with both hands.

� Pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) in the guides (Fig. 64,2) to the rearmost position (Fig. 64,3).

Closing: � Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 64,1) slightly upwards.

� Push the bar back in the guides.

� Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob (Fig. 63,2).

Ventilation position The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position (Fig. 65,1) and central position (Fig. 65,2). Depending on the model, the sky-light can be locked in the central position with the latch (Fig. 66,1).

� Press the safety knob (Fig. 63,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 63,1) down with both hands.

� Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 64,2) to the desired position.

� Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 65,1 or 2) and lock if necessary.

Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:

Closing: � Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Fig. 63 Safety knob on the Heki sky-light

Fig. 64 Heki skylight, guide

Fig. 65 Heki skylight in ventilation position

Fig. 66 Ventilation position locking mechanism

Page 76: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

76 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Opening: � Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:

Closing: � Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman shade.

Opening: � Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released.

� Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

7.5.5 Wind-up skylight

The wind-up skylight can be opened using the manual crank.

Opening: � Rotate the hand crank (Fig. 67,2) until a resistance can be felt (max. opening angle 70°).

Closing: � Rotate the hand crank until the wind-up skylight is closed. The wind-up sky-light can be locked after rotating two or three more times.

� Check the locking mechanism. To do so, press your hand against the acrylic glass.

Roman shade The Roman shade can be closed in any position, as desired. If the Roman shade is locked with the insect screen, the insect screen is also moved along on closing the Roman shade.

Closing: � Pull the handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 67,3) and release in the desired position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: � Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen If the insect screen is locked with the Roman shade, the Roman shade is also moved along on closing the insect screen.

Closing: � Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 67,1) to the opposite handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 67,3) and allow to engage.

Opening: � Press the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 67,1) at the back upwards and detach the insect screen from the Roman shade (Fig. 67,3).

� Slowly push insect screen at the handle to its initial position.

Fig. 67 Wind-up skylight

Page 77: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

77Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.6 Rotating seats

Depending on the model, the lever for turning the seats is located at the front of the seat or on the left or right side.

Turning: � Push both armrests at the driver's/front passenger's seat upward.

� Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central position.

� Push or pull the lever (Fig. 68,3 or Fig. 69,4) to turn the seat. The seat is released from the locking device.

The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-tion in the direction of travel.

7.7 Tables

7.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg

The suspension table size can be enlarged by inserting a table-top extension.

� Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must remain locked in place in the direction of travel.

� Setting the position of the seats and armrests is described in chapter 5.

Fig. 68 Driver's and front passenger's seats (Aguti)

Fig. 69 Driver's and front passenger's seats (ISRI)

� Depending on the model, different table-top extensions and fold-out legs are used. Therefore the table can deviate from the type shown here. The principle of the conversion is the same for all tables.

Fig. 70 Extend suspension table

Page 78: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

78 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Extending: � Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 70,2).

� Lift the table-top slightly and pull out it out as far as possible. The table extension (Fig. 70,1) is fully extended.

� Set down the table.

� Insert the table-top extension in the table extension.

� Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible.

� Tighten the knurled screws.

Reducing size: � Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 70,2).

� Slightly lift the front of the table-top and pull out.

� Remove the table-top extension and store it securely.

� Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible. The table extension (Fig. 70,1) is fully retracted.

� Set down the table.

� Tighten the knurled screws.

The table's fold-out leg enables it to be used as a bed foundation.

Conversion to bedfoundation:

� Lift the front of the table-top (Fig. 71,1) by approx. 45°.

� Fold the lower part of the fold-out leg (Fig. 71,3) by 90°. Depending on the model, pull the lower part of the fold-out leg down or push the release knob.

� Press the release knob (Fig. 72,1) on the lock (Fig. 71,4).

� Swivel the table-top approx. 45° upward and remove the table from the retainer.

� Depending on the model, insert both additional support legs (Fig. 71,2) into the holders (Fig. 71,5) on the bottom side of the table.

� Insert the table into the lower retainer and lock it.

Fig. 71 Bed foundation Fig. 72 Lock

Page 79: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

79Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.7.2 Swivel table for the round seating group

Fastening to the floor: � Place the swivel table next to the holder (Fig. 73,3) or on the holder (Fig. 74,2).

� Place the bar (Fig. 73,2) with the securing bolt (Fig. 73,1) over the table leg.

� Move the bar and possibly also the swivel table in such a way that the securing bolt (Fig. 73,1 or Fig. 74,1) can be screwed into the holder (Fig. 73,3 or Fig. 74,2).

� Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.

The swivel table's swivel mechanism enables it to be used as a bed founda-tion.

Conversion to bedfoundation (swivel table with

clamp):

� Push the handle (Fig. 75,2) upwards.

� Swivel the table-top (Fig. 75,1) down with a circular movement until the handle locks into place.

Conversion to bedfoundation (swivel table

without clamp):

� Rotate the handle (Fig. 76,2) into the horizontal position.

� Swivel the table-top (Fig. 76,1) downward in a circular movement.

� Turn the handle back to the vertical position. The swivel mechanism is locked.

� Lock the swivel table in position before commencing the journey.

Fig. 73 Lock for swivel table with clamp

Fig. 74 Lock for swivel table without clamp

Fig. 75 Lock for swivel table with clamp

Fig. 76 Lock for swivel table without clamp

Page 80: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

80 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.7.3 Fixed table (movable table-top)

The top of the fixed table can be moved both lengthways and crossways.

Moving in a lengthwaysdirection:

� Undo the knurled screw (Fig. 77,2).

� Move the table-top (Fig. 77,3) to the desired position.

� Retighten the knurled screw.

Moving in a crosswaysdirection:

� Undo the knurled screw (Fig. 77,1).

� Move the table-top (Fig. 77,3) to the desired position.

� Retighten the knurled screw.

The fixed table cannot be used as a bed foundation.

7.7.4 Fixed table

Fastening to the floor: � Place the fixed table with the perforated plate (Fig. 78,2) on to the holder (Fig. 78,3).

� Move the fixed table in such a way that the securing bolt (Fig. 78,1) can be screwed into the holder (Fig. 78,3).

� Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.

Fig. 77 Fixed table (movable table-top)

� Lock the fixed table in position before commencing the journey.

Fig. 78 Locking mechanism for fixed table

Page 81: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

81Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

The table-top of the fixed table can be moved lengthways or folded to the side.

Moving in a lengthwaysdirection:

� Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 79,2 and 3).

� Shift the table-top.

� Lock the table-top with the fixing screws.

Folding the table-top to theside:

� Remove the fixing screw (Fig. 79,1).

� Fold the table-top to the side.

Depending on the model, the table top of the fixed table can be enlarged.

Extending: � Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 79,2 and 3).

� Pull the table top apart.

� Insert the table-top extension (Fig. 80,1).

� Push the table top back together.

� Tighten the knurled screws.

Reducing size: � Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 79,2 and 3).

� Pull the table top apart.

� Remove the table-top extension (Fig. 80,1) and store it securely.

� Push the table top back together.

� Tighten the knurled screws.

Fig. 79 Fixed table (from below)

Fig. 80 Extending the fixed table

Page 82: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

82 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.7.5 Lift-off table for the round seating group

The lift-off table's lifting mechanism permits it to be used as a bed foundation.

Conversion to bedfoundation:

� Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 81,3) to the left. The lock is open.

� Press the table-top (Fig. 81,2) in the middle downwards to the desired stop limit (Fig. 81,1 or 4) and hold it down.

� Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 81,3) to the right. The lift-off table is locked.

7.8 Television

Flat screen in the TVcabinet

The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.

Pulling the televisionconsole forward:

� Press the release knob (Fig. 82,5) and pull the holder for the flat screen for-ward as far as possible by the handle (Fig. 82,4).

� The lift-off table is not secured to the floor. Before the journey, lower the lift-off table to the top limit and secure to the benches with the straps provided.

Fig. 81 Lift-off table for the round seating group

� Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely.

� Before commencing the journey, turn the flat screen and the screen holder back to the basic position and slide them in until they lock into place. Close the TV cabinet.

� Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-tion. Danger of accidents!

Fig. 82 TV cabinet

Page 83: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

83Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

Swivelling the televisionconsole:

� Pull the release knob (Fig. 82,1) and swivel flat screen (Fig. 82,2) to the desired position.

� Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 82,3).

� Set the desired angle for the flat screen and re-tighten the knurled screw.

Flat screen with jointedarm

The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.

Positioning the flat screenwith jointed arm:

� Pull on the fabric strip (Fig. 83,3) to unlock the jointed arm (Fig. 83,2).

� Swivel flat screen (Fig. 83,1) into the required position.

� Take hold of the flat screen at the top and bottom edge with both hands and set the desired angle of inclination.

7.9 Lamps

Turning spotlight: � Grasp the housing (Fig. 84,2) and turn it.

The housing can be turned in different directions:

� To the left and to the right� Up and down

Fig. 83 Flat screen with jointed arm

� Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot.

� Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching them.

� If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety dis-tance of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable objects. Fire hazard!

Fig. 84 Spotlight

Page 84: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

84 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Shifting spotlight: � Grasp the holder (Fig. 84,1).

� Push spotlight along the rail system to desired position.

7.10 Light switch

Depending on the model, there is a light switch for lighting the entrance at the bottom of the entrance area (Fig. 85,1).

7.11 Extending the seating group

7.11.1 Extending the central seating group

� Extend the table (Fig. 86,3) (see section 7.7).

� Pull on the handle (Fig. 86,8) and open the flap (Fig. 86,4).

� Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 87,7) and wedge together with the flap (Fig. 87,4).

� Place the back cushions (Fig. 87,1) and the seat cushions (Fig. 87,2) on the bench seat extension.

� The light switches have different layouts according to the model. The light switches are located either directly on the corresponding lamp or next to the lamp, e.g. in the vicinity of the seating group.

Fig. 85 Light switch for lighting entrance

Fig. 86 Before extending

Fig. 87 After extending

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Flap5 Additional cushion6 Additional cushion7 Bench seat extension8 Handle

Page 85: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

85Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

� Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 87,6) between the seat cushions and the exterior wall.

� Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 87,5) between the back cushions and the exterior wall.

7.12 Beds

7.12.1 Overcab bed

Access ladder Always use the access ladder (Fig. 88,4) provided as standard to access the overcab bed.

Attaching: � Attach the ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 88,5) on the alcove panel.

Safety net The safety net (Fig. 88,3) is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the alcove.

Setting up: � Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 88,1) to the holders on the ceiling (Fig. 88,2).

Folding mechanism Depending on the model, the overcab bed can be folded upwards. This sim-plifies passage from driver's cabin to living area.

� The maximum permitted overcab bed load is 200 kg.

� Only use the overcab bed, if the safety net is set up.

� Never allow small children to remain in the overcab bed without super-vision.

� But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the overcab bed.

� Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

� Do not load the overcab bed without mattress. The plastic mould part can break!

Fig. 88 Overcab bed

Page 86: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

86 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Folding upwards: � Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.

� Fold the front of the overcab bed (Fig. 89,1) upwards. The overcab bed is kept in the upper position by gas-pressure springs.

Folding downwards: � Pull overcab bed downwards.

� If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.

7.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I)

Preparing the driver'scabin

Depending on equipment, the driver's and front passenger's seats have to be adjusted in different ways before lowering the pull-down bed.

Variant 1 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of travel are not equipped with headrests (no safety package).

� Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat to the direction of vehicle travel, lock them in place and move them backwards.

� Fold the backrest back.

� Close the shade in the driver's cabin.

Fig. 89 Overcab bed, folded upwards

� The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.

� The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage. When the bed is not being used, only place the bed linen which is required for two persons in it.

� Before commencing the journey, secure the pull-down bed to the roof using the retaining belt. Tighten the retaining belt firmly.

� Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.

� Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super-vision.

� But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.

� Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

� Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when the bed is lowered. Fire hazard!

� Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is pushed up. Fire hazard!

� Depending on the seat model, the backrest is under strong spring ten-sion. If there is no resistance to the backrest in these seats, it quickly moves forward after unlocking.

Page 87: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

87Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

Variant 2 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on driver's and front passenger's seats can be removed.

� Remove the headrests.

� Turn the driver's seat to the direction of travel, lock it in place and move it backwards.

� Fold the backrest of the passenger's seat back.

� Push the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the backrest back com-pletely.

� Turn the front passenger's seat in the opposite direction to the direction of travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered.

� Close the shade in the driver's cabin.

Variant 3 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on driver's and front passenger's seats can not be removed.

� Push the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the backrest back completely.

� Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat in the opposite direc-tion to the direction of travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered com-pletely.

� Close the shade in the driver's cabin.

Lowering the pull-down bed: � Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed.

� Undo the retaining belt (Fig. 90,5) at the roof (Fig. 90,2).

� Swing the pull-down bed down in a circle until it locks into place audibly.

Folding the pull-down bedup:

� Switch off the reading lamps on the ceiling above the pull-down bed.

� Loosen the retaining straps of the safety net and lay the safety net under the mattress.

� Use both hands to push the pull-down bed upwards.

� Secure the pull-down bed to the roof (Fig. 90,2) by means of the retaining belt (Fig. 90,5).

Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down bed.

� Hook the access ladder to the pull-down bed by attaching both brackets into the U-bolts (Fig. 90,4).

Fig. 90 Pull-down bed

Page 88: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

88 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Safety net The safety net is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.

Setting up: � Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 90,1) to the holders (Fig. 90,3) on the ceiling.

7.12.3 Bunk bed

Depending on the model, the rear area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed can also be used as a rear garage.

Converting the bunk bedinto the rear garage:

� Pull on the loop (Fig. 91,3) and release the latch (Fig. 91,1).

� Pull the slatted frame (Fig. 91,2) together with the mattress forward until it latches in place.

Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.

Attaching: � Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 92,3) on the panel.

Safety net The safety net (Fig. 92,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame. Do not use the safety net until the person is already in bed.

Setting up: � Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 92,2) to the holders on the ceiling.

� The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.

� Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.

� Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.

� But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.

� Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

Fig. 91 Bunk bed (rear)

Fig. 92 Safety net

Page 89: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

89Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.12.4 Bunk bed (side)

Depending on the model, the side area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed can also be used as a storage area.

Converting the storage areato a bunk bed:

� Open the storage flap and fold out the support leg (Fig. 93,2) under the bed.

� Pull the loop (Fig. 93,1) and tilt the bed (Fig. 93,3) downwards.

� Take the mattress (Fig. 94,3) off the top bed and place it on the bottom bed.

Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.

Attaching: � Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 94,4) on the panel.

Safety net The safety net (Fig. 94,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame. Do not use the safety net until the persons are already in bed.

Setting up: � Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 94,2) to the holders on the ceiling.

� The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.

� Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.

� Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.

� But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.

� Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

� Remove the mattress from the bottom bed and put it on the top bed before converting the bunk bed into a storage compartment.

Fig. 93 Supports and unlocking device Fig. 94 Bunk bed (side)

Page 90: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

90 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.12.5 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)

A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to place items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside.

Opening: � Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.

� Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 95,1) hold the slatted frame open.

Closing: � Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pres-sure springs.

� If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.

Fig. 95 Fixed bed

Page 91: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

91Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping

7.13.1 Central seating group

� Convert the table (Fig. 96,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� Depending on the model, insert the bar (Fig. 96,4) or pull it inwards. The bar is correctly positioned if it supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm behind the table leg.

� Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 97,2) into the centre.

� Insert the back cushions (Fig. 97,1) between the seat cushions and the wall.

� Depending on the model, the seating group can be different in shape and position to the one shown here.

� Depending on the model, an enclosed additional cushion must be inserted between the seat cushions.

Fig. 96 Prior to conversion

Fig. 97 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Bar5 Mounting rail

� Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 97,1) an additional cushion must be inserted.

Page 92: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

92 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.13.2 Central seating group with extension

� Extend the table (Fig. 98,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� Insert the bar (Fig. 98,7) or pull it inwards. The bar is correctly positioned if it supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm behind the table leg.

� Pull on the handle (Fig. 98,8) and open the flap (Fig. 98,5).

� Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 99,6) and wedge it with the flap.

� Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 100,2) forwards and to the middle.

� Insert the back cushions (Fig. 100,1) between the seat cushions and the wall.

� Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 100,9) between the back cushions and the wall.

� Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 100,10) between the seat cushions and the wall.

Fig. 98 Prior to conversion

Fig. 99 During conversion

Fig. 100 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Mounting rail5 Flap6 Bench seat extension7 Bar8 Handle9 Additional cushion

10 Additional cushion

� Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 100,1) and the second additional cushion (Fig. 100,9) two smaller additional cush-ions must be inserted.

Page 93: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

93Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.13.3 Central seating group with divan

� Convert the central seating group for sleeping (see section 7.13.2).

� Remove the armrests (Fig. 101,3) of the divan and lay it aside.

� Pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 102,4).

� Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 103,2) to the central seating group.

� Remove the additional cushion (Fig. 103,1) from the back cushion (Fig. 102,5). The additional cushion is fixed to the back cushion with Velcro and can easily be separated.

� Lay the back cushion aside.

� Insert the additional cushion between the seat cushions and the exterior wall.

Fig. 101 Prior to conversion

Fig. 102 During conversion

Fig. 103 After conversion

1 Additional cushion2 Seat cushion3 Armrest4 Slatted frame5 Back cushion

� For model A 5831 a small additional cushion must be inserted on the divan behind the front passenger's seat.

Page 94: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

94 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.13.4 Round seating group (without slatted frame)

� Convert the table (Fig. 104,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 105,2) into the centre.

� Insert the back cushions (Fig. 105,1) between the seat cushions and the exterior wall.

� Remove the back cushions (Fig. 105,4 and 5) and lay them aside.

Fig. 104 Prior to conversion

Fig. 105 During conversion

Fig. 106 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Back cushion5 Back cushion

Page 95: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

95Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.13.5 Round seating group (with slatted frame)

� Convert the table (Fig. 107,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� Pull out the slatted frames (Fig. 108,5).

� Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 108,2) into the centre.

� Insert the back cushions (Fig. 108,1) between the seat cushions and the exterior wall.

� Remove the back cushions (Fig. 108,4) and lay them aside.

Fig. 107 Prior to conversion

Fig. 108 During conversion

Fig. 109 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Back cushion5 Slatted frame

Page 96: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

96 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.13.6 Front bench seat

� Turn the driver's seat (Fig. 110,4) and push it all the way forward.

� Convert the table (Fig. 110,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� If the vehicle has a guest bed foundation (Fig. 111,6), remove the back cushion (Fig. 110,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 110,2) and lay them aside.

� Depending on the model, lay the included guest bed foundation (Fig. 111,6) onto the table. Lay the front edge of the guest bed foundation directly against the driver's seat or the brace on the driver's cabin.

� Place the additional cushion (Fig. 111,5) on the driver's seat.

� Place the seat cushion (Fig. 111,2) on the table.

� Insert the back cushion (Fig. 111,1) between the seat cushion and the rear wall. Observe the wedged form.

� If required, push the driver's seat (Fig. 111,4) back to the rear.

Fig. 110 Prior to conversion

Fig. 111 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Driver's seat5 Additional cushion6 Guest bed foundation

Page 97: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

97Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.13.7 Front bench seat with divan

� Extend the table (Fig. 112,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 112,6).

� Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 113,7) and wedge it with the flap.

� Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 114,2) of the divan into the middle.

� Place the back cushion (Fig. 114,1) of the divan to the side between the seat cushion and the wall.

� Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 114,5) forwards onto the table.

� Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 114,4) and pull it into the middle.

� Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 114,8) between the back cushion (Fig. 114,4) and the seat cushion (Fig. 114,5).

� Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 114,9) between the back cushion (Fig. 114,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 114,2).

Fig. 112 Prior to conversion

Fig. 113 During conversion

Fig. 114 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Back cushion5 Seat cushion6 Flap7 Bench seat extension8 Additional cushion9 Additional cushion

Page 98: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

98 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

7.13.8 Front bench seat with divan (extendable)

� Extend the table (Fig. 115,4) and convert it into a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 115,7).

� Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 116,8) and wedge it with the flap.

� Pull out the bedding box extension (Fig. 116,3).

� Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 117,2) of the divan into the middle.

� Place the back cushion (Fig. 117,1) of the divan to the side between the seat cushion and the wall.

� Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 117,6) forwards onto the table.

� Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 117,5) and pull it into the middle.

� Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 117,9) between the back cushion (Fig. 117,5) and the seat cushion (Fig. 117,6).

� Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 117,10) between the back cushion (Fig. 117,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 117,2).

Fig. 115 Prior to conversion

Fig. 116 During conversion

Fig. 117 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Bedding box extension4 Table5 Back cushion6 Seat cushion7 Flap8 Bench seat extension9 Additional cushion

10 Additional cushion

Page 99: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

99Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living 7

7.13.9 Front seating group

� Convert the table (Fig. 118,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).

� Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 119,2 and 4) into the centre.

� Insert the back cushions (Fig. 119,1 and 5) between the seat cushions and the exterior wall.

� Place the additional cushion (Fig. 120,6) between the seat cushions (Fig. 120,2 and 4).

Fig. 118 Prior to conversion

Fig. 119 During conversion

Fig. 120 After conversion

1 Back cushion2 Seat cushion3 Table4 Seat cushion5 Back cushion6 Additional cushion

Page 100: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

100 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Living7

Page 101: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

101Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system 8

8Gas systemChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� safety� gas consumption� changing the gas bottles� gas isolator taps� external gas connection� automatic switching facility

The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in chapter 10.

8.1 General

� Close all gas isolator taps and the regulator tap before commencing the journey and when leaving the vehicle.

� No source of combustion using gas (gas cooker, gas heater, gas boiler, etc.) may be in operation when filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!

� Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-ised specialist workshop.

� Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

� The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. We recommend having the gas pressure regulator checked no later than every 10 years.

� In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.

� If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).

� Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.

� Open a skylight before taking open sources of combustion (gas cooker) into service.

� Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.

� If the vehicle or gas devices are not used, close the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

� If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap.

� Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time.

� The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.

Page 102: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

102 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system8

8.2 Gas bottles

� Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.

� Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.

� Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside.

� Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-proof.

� Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the gas bottle compartment.

� The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.

� Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.

� The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage.

� Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may be allowed to lie against the vehicle. Keep the intake openings under the floor of the vehicle open and clean.

� Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment.

� Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.

� Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.

� If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top.

� Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.

� The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).

� Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements.

� Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 °C.

� Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles! Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve.

� Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles.

� Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

Page 103: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

103Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system 8

8.3 Gas consumption

Example A full 11 kg gas bottle is sufficient to:

� Cook for 3 days using one flame,� Heat for 22 hours on full output or � Cool for 25 days.

� With some models, the gas bottle compartment is located right next to the conversion door. With these models, only open the gas bottle compartment when the conversion door is closed. Danger from damages.

� For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar.

� Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle valve.

The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle down to the operating pressure of the gas devices.

� If 2 gas bottles are used at the same time: Connect a gas pressure regu-lator fitted with an automatic switchover device.

� Information available at the dealers or service centre.

� For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe, camping supply stores have corresponding adapter sets.

� For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.

� The data about gas consumption of the individual gas devices is standard average values.

Appliances Gas consumption in grams/hour

Heater Approx. 170 - 490 g/h

Cooker, per cooker Approx. 140 - 165 g/h

Refrigerator Approx. 18 g/h

Page 104: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

104 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system8

8.4 Changing gas bottles

Depending on the model, the gas bottle holder can be pulled out of the gas bottle compartment:

� Open external gas bottle compartment (see section 7.2).

� If there is a guard plate (Fig. 121,1), fold it down.

� Unlock the slide (Fig. 121,3) using the handle (Fig. 121,2).

� Pull out the slide (Fig. 121,3) as far as possible.

� Turn back the handle (Fig. 121,2).

� Close the regulator tap (Fig. 122,4) on the gas bottle. Pay attention to the direction of the arrow.

� Unscrew the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 122,2) from the gas bottle at the hexagon nut (Fig. 122,3).

� Remove the gas pressure regulator and the gas tube (Fig. 122,1) from the gas bottle.

� Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle.

� Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment.

� Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts.

� Position the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 122,2) and the gas tube (Fig. 122,1) on the gas bottle and screw in tightly to the gas bottle at the hexagonal nut (Fig. 122,3).

� Unlock the slide (Fig. 121,3) using the handle (Fig. 121,2).

� Push in the slide (Fig. 121,3) as far as possible, and turn back the handle (Fig. 121,2).

� If there is a guard plate (Fig. 121,1), fold it up.

� Close the external flap (see section 7.2).

� When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.

� When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at the connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray the relevant connection point or union. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

Fig. 121 Gas bottle compartment Fig. 122 Gas bottle connection

Page 105: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

105Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system 8

8.5 Gas isolator taps

A gas isolator tap (Fig. 123) for every gas device is built into the vehicle.

The gas isolator taps can be found on the front of the cooker.

8.6 External gas connection

The external gas connection (Fig. 124) is located at the rear or to the left of the vehicle depending on the model.

Fig. 123 Symbols for the gas isolator taps

1 Refrigerator2 Cooker3 Heater/boiler4 Oven

� If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator tap.

� Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the external gas connection.

� Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an opera-tion pressure of 30 mbar.

� Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap, make sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a leak in the external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air. Immediately close the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Have the external gas connection checked by an authorised spe-cialist workshop.

� When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is nothing near the external gas connection that could cause a spark.

� Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the information stickers on the external gas connection.

Fig. 124 External gas connection, gas isolator tap closed

Page 106: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

106 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system8

� Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 124,1).

� Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 124,2).

8.7 Duomatic switching facility

The Duomatic is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-bottle gas system. The Duomatic switching facility automatically switches gas supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may still continue operation. The Duomatic switching facility is suitable for all com-mercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.

Construction of the unit The Duomatic switching facility consists of a central regulator (Fig. 125,3) and a switching regulator (Fig. 125,5). The knob (Fig. 125,6) on the switching reg-ulator is used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which is to be used as a reserve bottle.

Both regulators are equipped with a pressure controller and the regulator defroster Eis-Ex. This prevents damage to the gas system during the winter months.

The manometer (Fig. 125,2) on the central regulator indicates the pressure in the gas bottle, not the filling level of the gas bottle. The manometer can be used to test the impermeability of the gas bottle.

Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 126). The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 125,1 and 4) must be opened man-ually.

The central regulator provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit show which gas bottle can be used to provide gas. When both indicator lamps are illuminated, the position of the knob on the switching regulator indicates which gas bottle is currently being drawn upon.

� Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.

� If the vehicle is equipped with the Panel DT 220, the switching facility is operated via the panel. The operating unit is not provided in these models.

� Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 125 Duomatic switching facility Fig. 126 Operating unit

� When operating with only one gas bottle (e.g. during the summer) connect the central regulator to this bottle. Position the knob on the switching regu-lator in the red area.

Page 107: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

107Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system 8

Operating modes The Duomatic switching facility has two operating modes:

� Winter operation "On and heating"� Summer operation "On"

Putting into operation: � Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 125,1 and 4).

� Use the knob (Fig. 125,6) on the switching regulator (Fig. 125,5) to select the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).Always turn the knob as far as it will go. When the knob is in the red area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas bottle with the central regulator (Fig. 125,3).When the knob is in the green area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas bottle with the switching regulator (Fig. 125,5).

� Switch on the Duomatic switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 126).To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 126,2) to winter operation "On and heating" (Fig. 126,4) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 126,6). Both gas pressure regulators are now ventilated. The operating indicator (Fig. 126,3) lights up.

Switching off: � Set the rocker switch (Fig. 126,2) to " " (Fig. 126,5). The operating indi-cator (Fig. 126,3) goes out.

� Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 125,1 and 4).

Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 126) indicate in the vehicle inte-rior whether the gas bottles are ready for operation.

� Indicator lamp "A" (Fig. 126,1): Gas bottle on the central regulator� Indicator lamp "B" (Fig. 126,7): Gas bottle on the switching regulator

Changing gas bottles If an indicator lamp goes out during operation, this signifies that the corre-sponding gas bottle is empty and must be replaced. The reserve bottle con-tinues supplying the gas appliances with gas.

Changing gas bottles: � Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.

� Unscrew the regulator of the gas bottle.

� Connect the full gas bottle to the regulator.

� Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

� Set the knob on the switching regulator with a half-turn, so that the newly replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.

� When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.

� Always mount the regulator in such a way that the protective cap faces upwards.

Page 108: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

108 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Gas system8

Page 109: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

109Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

9Electrical systemChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� safety� explanations of terms relating to the battery� 12 V power supply� living area battery� loading the batteries� transformer/rectifier� panel� 240 V power supply� connection to the 240 V power supply� fuse rating

The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in chapter 10.

9.1 General safety instructions

The vehicle is a safe place during a storm (Faraday cage). However, to protect the electrical devices, disconnect the 240 V connection and retract the antennae as a precaution.

9.2 Terms

Off-load voltage The off-load voltage is the voltage of the battery in idle condition, i. e. no cur-rent is consumed and the battery is not being charged.

Closed circuit current Some electrical appliances, such as the clock and the indicator lamps, require continuous electric current, for this reason they are referred to as inactive appliances. This closed circuit current flows even if the 12 V power supply has been switched off.

Total discharge Total discharge of the battery is imminent, if a battery is completely discharged by an active appliance and by closed circuit current.

Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery.

� Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.

� All electronic devices (e.g. mobile telephones, radios, televisions or DVD players) which have been retrofitted to the vehicle and are operated during the journey must have certain features: These are the CE certifi-cation, the EMC inspection (electromagnetic compatibility) and the "E1" inspection.

Only in this way can the functional reliability of the vehicle be ensured. Otherwise the airbag may be triggered or interference to the on-board electronics may result.

� Total discharge damages the battery.

Page 110: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

110 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). If a battery possesses a capacity of 80 Ah, then the battery can dispense a current of 1 A for 80 hours or a current of 2 A for 40 hours.

External influences such as temperature may alter the storage capacity of the battery.

9.3 12 V power supply

When the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply or the 240 V power supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area with 12 V DC. The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, electrical appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be operated for a long time without using the 240 V power supply.

During heater operation, the circulation fan is switched on and off by a thermo-stat control. As a result the living area battery is loaded if no 240 V power supply is connected.

When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area battery and the starter battery.

The 12 V power supply can be cut off with the 12 V main switch on the panel. Depending on the model, the heater, basic light/entrance step and reserve 4 or only the electrical entrance step remain on standby. The refrigerator is then only operated with 12 V if the vehicle engine is running. This helps to prevent the living area battery from being run down too quickly.

9.3.1 Living area battery

� To disconnect all electrical 12 V appliances from the power supply, discon-nect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply. Depending on the model, either press the switch on the transformer/rectifier or activate the battery separation on the panel to do so.

� The radio in the driver's cabin and the independent vehicle heater are by default connected to the living area battery via a separate fuse. These appliances will stay operational if the living area battery is disconnected from the power supply via the battery cut-off switch of the transformer/rec-tifier or the battery separation on the panel.

� Prior to commencing a journey ensure the living area battery is fully charged. For this reason charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours before commencing the journey.

� During the trip, use every opportunity to charge the living area battery.

� Charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours after the journey.

� Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.

� Use the charger module provided on the transformer/rectifier to charge the living area battery. When charging externally, use a regulated charger that is suitable for the battery type (a lead acid or dryfill battery) and the capacity of the living area battery.

� For long periods of inactivity (4 weeks or more), either disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply or recharge it regularly.

� When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type. A dryfill battery may only be replaced by a dryfill battery.

Page 111: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

111Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

Position Depending on the model, the living area battery is installed either under the driver's seat, under the front passenger's seat or in the bench behind the front passenger's seat.

Discharging The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some electrical appliances continuously require.

The self-discharge rate of the battery is dependant on temperature. At 20 to 25 °C the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The self-discharge rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 °C the self-dis-charge rate is approx. 20 % of the capacity per month.

During periods of low external temperatures, the battery will lose part of its capacity.

An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available.

The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of the living area battery is consumed.

� When changing the living area battery, use only batteries which meet the minimum capacity of the charger. Observe the separate instruction manual for the charger. Lower-capacity batteries will generate a great deal of heat when they are charged. Danger of explosion!

� Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances. Danger of short circuit!

� If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the ignition. Danger of short circuit!

� Take note of the battery manufacturer's users and maintenance instruc-tions.

� The dryfill battery is maintenance-free. Maintenance-free means:

It is not necessary to check the acid level.

It is not necessary to lubricate the battery poles.

It is not necessary to refill the distilled water.

Even a maintenance-free dryfill battery must be charged regularly.

� Total discharge damages the battery.

� Recharge battery in good time.

� Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

Page 112: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

112 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

9.4 Charging the living area battery and starter battery

The starter battery can only be fully charged with an external charger. If a 240 V power supply is used, the transformer/rectifier charges the starter bat-tery with a float charge only. Even in mobile operation, the vehicle engine alter-nator is not capable of completely charging the starter battery.

9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply

If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is charged with a float charge of 2 A. The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.

To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.

9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine

When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read on the panel.

9.4.3 Charging with an external charger

When charging the living area battery and the starter battery with an external charger, proceed as follows:

� Turn off the vehicle engine.

� Switch off 12 V main switch on the panel. The indicator lamp will go off.

� The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the skin or the eyes is to be avoided.

� In the case of charging with an external charger there is danger of explo-sion. Only charge the battery in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks.

� Always remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle when charging them using an external charger.

� Do not connect the battery cables to the wrong poles.

� If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the ignition. Danger of short circuit!

� Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances. Danger of short circuit!

� Before charging a dryfill battery, check whether the external charger is approved for dryfill batteries.

� Observe the instruction manuals for the base vehicle and the charger.

� Irreparable damage to the living area battery will result if it is overcharged.

Page 113: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

113Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

� Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply.

� Disconnect the mains plug from the transformer/rectifier.

� Switch off all gas appliances, all gas isolator taps and close the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

� There is a danger of short circuit when disconnecting the battery poles. For this reason, first disconnect the negative terminal on the living area battery or the starter battery and then the positive.

� Remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle.

� Check that the external charger is turned off.

� Connect the external charger to the living area battery or the starter battery. Pay attention to the polarity: First connect the positive terminal "+" to the positive pole of the battery, then connect the negative terminal "–" to the negative pole of the battery.

� Switch on the external charger.

� See the instructions for use of the connected charger for information con-cerning charge period required for the battery.

� See the specifications on the battery for information concerning its strength.

� Disconnect the external charger in reverse order.

9.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)� Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!

� Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.

� Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Page 114: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

114 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:

� The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.

� The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.� The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and

secures them.� The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator

and an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring func-tions.

� When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the 12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.

The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.

When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from over-heating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.

Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier is located in the seat con-sole under the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

Fig. 127 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)

1 Main supply socket 240 V~2 Output: Block 1 - refrigerator3 Input: Block 2 - control lines4 Output: Block 4 - heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance

area), entrance step5 Output: Block 3 - panel6 Output: Block 5 - solar cell (if fitted), spare 2, spare 3, spare 47 Output: Block 6 - solar charge regulator (if fitted)8 Output: Block 7 - auxiliary charging unit9 Output: Block 8 - consumer circuit 1, consumer circuit 2, TV, water pump, spare 1,

spare 5, spare 610 Battery selector switch (lead acid/dryfill option)11 Fuses12 Battery cut-off switch (battery On/Off)

Page 115: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

115Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

9.5.1 Battery cut-off switch

The battery cut-off switch disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly dis-charging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary lay-up).

The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery cut-off switch is turned off.

Switching on/off: � Press the battery cut-off switch up: Battery ON.

� Press the battery cut-off switch down: Battery OFF.

9.5.2 Battery selector switch

The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the trans-former/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead acid" or "dryfill" battery).

9.5.3 Battery monitor

The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.

If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.

A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas opera-tion.

� When the battery cut-off switch is OFF, the safety/drainage valve opens. The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery cut-off switch is ON again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.

� Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.

� After switching the battery cut-off switch back on again: Put the basic light (lighting in the entrance area), entrance step, heater and spare 4 back into service (depending on the model). To do so, switch on the 12 V main switch briefly. This also applies if the living area battery was disconnected and then reconnected.

� If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!

� Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat-tery.

� The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.

� You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos-sible.

Page 116: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

116 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

Measures: � Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the corresponding switch.

� If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been recharged.

9.5.4 Charging the battery

When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read on the panel.

If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is charged with a float charge of 2 A. The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.

To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.

9.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)� Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!

� Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Transformer/rectifier".

Page 117: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

117Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:

� The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.

� The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.� The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and

secures them.� The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator

and an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring func-tions.

� When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the 12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.

The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.

When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from over-heating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.

Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier (Fig. 128) is installed either in the seat console of the driver's seat or in the front passenger's seat.

Fig. 128 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)

1 Connections BL 2 - auxiliary charging unit 12 Connections BL 1 - auxiliary charging unit 23 Flat fuses4 Connections BL 9 - solar charge regulator5 Mains connection 240 V6 Connections BL 10 - panel7 Battery selector switch, lead acid/dryfill option8 Connections BL 13 - panel9 Connections BL 12 - sensor for living area battery D+

10 Connections BL 11 - panel11 Connections BL 8 - entrance step, TV, antenna12 Connections BL 6 - heater, water pump, spare13 Connections BL 7 - awning, tank heater, awning light14 Selector switch for the number of auxiliary charging units15 Connections BL 5 - solar charge regulator16 Connections BL 4 - refrigerator from starter battery17 Connections BL 3 - refrigerator

Page 118: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

118 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

9.6.1 Battery separation

The battery separation disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly dis-charging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary lay-up).

The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery separation is activated.

Activating/deactivating See section 9.9.1.

9.6.2 Battery selector switch

The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the trans-former/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead acid" or "dryfill" battery).

9.6.3 Battery monitor

The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.

If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.

A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas opera-tion.

� The safety/drainage valve will open after the activation of the battery sep-aration. The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery separation is deactivated again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.

� Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.

� After the deactivation of the battery separation the date and time have to be reset. The remaining settings will be saved at the activation of the bat-tery separation and will be maintained.

� If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!

� Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat-tery.

� The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.

� You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos-sible.

Page 119: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

119Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

Measures: � Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the corresponding switch.

� If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been recharged.

9.6.4 Charging the battery

When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read on the panel.

If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is charged with a float charge of 2 A. The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.

To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.

9.7 Panel IT 20-3

9.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water levels

Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter bat-tery or the living area battery.

With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 129,4), note the top scale. The gauge automati-cally lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.

Displays: � Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,3) " ": The battery voltage of the starter battery is displayed.

� Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,3) " ": The battery voltage of the living area battery is displayed.

The table below will help you correctly interpret the displayed battery voltage of the living area battery.

Fig. 129 Panel IT 20-3

1 12 V main switch2 12 V indicator lamp3 Rocker switch for reading the battery

voltage of the starter and living area batteries

4 V/tank gauge5 Rocker switch for reading the level in

the water or waste water tanks6 240 V indicator lamp7 ALARM warning light for the living

area battery

Page 120: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

120 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

Volume of water/wastewater

The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water.

With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 129,4), use the bottom scale. The gauge automat-ically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.

Battery voltage(values during operation)

Mobile operation(vehicle moving, no 240 V con-nection)

Battery opera-tion(vehicle station-ary, no 240 V connection)

Power operation(vehicle station-ary, 240 V con-nection)

Danger of totaldischarge (battery

alarm)

11 V or less 1)

1) The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).

12 V power sup-ply overload

If appliances are switched off: Bat-tery flat

If appliances are switched on: Bat-tery overload

12 V power sup-ply overload

The battery is not charged by the al-ternator, the alter-nator's regulator is defective

The battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifi-er, the transform-er/rectifier is defective

11.1 V to 13.2 V 12 V power sup-

ply overload 2)

2) If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.

Normal range 12 V power sup-

ply overload 2)

The battery is not charged by the al-ternator, the alter-nator's regulator is defective

The battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifi-er, the transform-er/rectifier is defective

13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being charged (main charge)

Occurs only brief-ly after charging

Battery is being charged (main charge)

13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being charged (float charge)

– Battery being charged (float charge)

Over 14.5 V Battery is over-charged, defec-tive alternator control

– Battery is over-charged, defec-tive transformer/rectifier

Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery

Less than 11 V Totally discharged

12.3 V 50 %

12.5 V 75 %

More than 12.8 V Full

� Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.

� Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long time can damage the transducers.

Page 121: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

121Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

Displays:� Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,5) " ": The volume of

water is displayed.

� Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,5) " ": The volume of waste water is displayed.

9.7.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery

The red ALARM warning light (Fig. 129,7) flashes as soon as the voltage of the living area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there is a risk of a total discharge.

9.7.3 12 V main switch

The 12 V main switch (Fig. 129,1) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply of the living area on and off.

Exception: Depending on the model, safety/drainage valve, heater, basic light (lighting in the entrance area), entrance step and spare 4 remain ready to operate.

Switching on: � Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,1) "12 V": The 12 V living area power supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 129,2) lights up green.

Switching off: � Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,1) " ": The 12 V living area power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 129,2) goes out.

9.7.4 12 V indicator lamp

The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 129,2) illuminates whenever the 12 V main switch (Fig. 129,1) is switched on.

9.7.5 240 V indicator lamp

The yellow 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 129,6) illuminates whenever line voltage is available at the transformer/rectifier input.

� When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V power supply.

� Total discharge damages the battery.

� If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.

� When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.

� Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

Page 122: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

122 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

9.8 Panel IT 992

9.8.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water levels

Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter bat-tery or the living area battery.

With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 130,1), note the top scale. The gauge automati-cally lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.

Displays: � Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,9) up " ": The battery voltage of the starter battery is displayed.

� Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,9) down " ": The battery voltage of the living area battery is displayed.

The following tables will help you correctly interpret the battery voltage of the living area battery displayed on the panel IT 992.

Fig. 130 Panel IT 992

1 V/tank gauge2 Current gauge3 12 V indicator lamp4 12 V main switch5 240 V indicator lamp6 Rocker switch for special equipment7 Rocker switch for reading the level in

the water or waste water tanks8 ALARM warning light for the living

area battery9 Rocker switch for reading the battery

voltage of the starter and living area batteries

Battery voltage(values during operation)

Mobile operation(vehicle moving, no 240 V con-nection)

Battery opera-tion(vehicle station-ary, no 240 V connection)

Power operation(vehicle station-ary, 240 V con-nection)

Danger of totaldischarge (battery

alarm)

11 V or less 1) 12 V power sup-ply overload

If appliances are switched off: Bat-tery flat

If appliances are switched on: Bat-tery overload

12 V power sup-ply overload

The battery is not charged by the al-ternator, the alter-nator's regulator is defective

The battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifi-er, the transform-er/rectifier is defective

11.1 V to 13.2 V 12 V power sup-

ply overload 2)Normal range 12 V power sup-

ply overload 2)

The battery is not charged by the al-ternator, the alter-nator's regulator is defective

The battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifi-er, the transform-er/rectifier is defective

Page 123: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

123Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

Volume of water/wastewater

The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water.

With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 130,1), use the bottom scale. The gauge automat-ically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.

Displays:� Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,7) up " ": The volume of water is dis-

played.

� Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,7) down " ": The volume of waste water is displayed.

9.8.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery

The red ALARM warning light (Fig. 130,8) flashes as soon as the voltage of the living area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there is a risk of a total discharge.

13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being charged (main charge)

Occurs only brief-ly after charging

Battery is being charged (main charge)

13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being charged (float charge)

– Battery being charged (float charge)

Over 14.5 V Battery is over-charged, defec-tive alternator control

– Battery is over-charged, defec-tive transformer/rectifier

1) The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).2) If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.

Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery

Less than 11 V Totally discharged

12.3 V 50 %

12.5 V 75 %

More than 12.8 V Full

� Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.

Battery voltage(values during operation)

Mobile operation(vehicle moving, no 240 V con-nection)

Battery opera-tion(vehicle station-ary, no 240 V connection)

Power operation(vehicle station-ary, 240 V con-nection)

� Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long time can damage the transducers.

� When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V power supply.

� Total discharge damages the battery.

Page 124: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

124 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

9.8.3 Current gauge for charging/discharging the living area battery

The battery current actually flowing is permanently displayed on the current gauge (Fig. 130,2). The gauge automatically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.

� Red "discharging" zone: Battery is being discharged at the discharging cur-rent indicated between 0 and 30 A.

� Indicator "0": Battery is neither being charged nor discharged.� Green "charging" zone: Battery is being charged at the charging current

indicated between 0 and 30 A.

9.8.4 12 V main switch

The 12 V main switch (Fig. 130,4) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply of the living area on and off.

Exception: Depending on the model, safety/drainage valve, heater, basic light (lighting in the entrance area), entrance step and spare 4 remain ready to operate.

Switching on: � Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,4) up " ": The 12 V living area power supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 130,3) lights up green.

Switching off: � Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,4) down " ": The 12 V living area power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 130,3) goes out.

� If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.

Display Mobile operation(vehicle moving, no 240 V con-nection)

Battery opera-tion(vehicle station-ary, no 240 V connection)

Power operation(vehicle station-ary, 240 V con-nection)

Notes for charging/discharge display

Red "discharg-ing" zone (dis-charging current)

No charge!

Too many appli-ances are switched on or the alternator is de-fective

Appliances are on

Battery is being discharged

No charge!

Too many appli-ances are switched on

0 A (there is no current)

Battery fully or vir-

tually charged 1)

1) If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off (apart from the refrigerator).

Appliances are switched off

Battery fully or vir-

tually charged 2)

2) If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off.

Green zone (charging current)

Battery is being charged (up to 30 A possible)

Battery is being charged (only possible with solar power)

Battery is being charged (up to max. 16 A possi-ble; with 32 A auxiliary charging unit)

Page 125: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

125Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

9.8.5 12 V indicator lamp

The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 130,3) illuminates whenever the 12 V main switch (Fig. 130,4) is switched on.

9.8.6 240 V indicator lamp

The yellow 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 130,5) illuminates whenever line voltage is available at the transformer/rectifier input.

9.8.7 Switch for water pump

Switching on: � Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,6) up: The water pump is turned on.

Switching off: � Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,6) down " ": The water pump is switched off.

9.9 Panel DT 220

9.9.1 12 V main switch

The 12 V main switch (Fig. 131,8) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply of the living area on and off.

Depending on the model, the following components remain ready for opera-tion:

� Safety/drainage valve� Heater� Entrance step� Spare 4� Waste water tank heater� Awning light� Awning� Antenna� Refrigerator with automatic power selection

� When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.

� Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

Fig. 131 Panel DT 220

1 Key basic menu2 Key battery menu3 Key setting menu4 Key for switching to the next value or

for increasing a selected value5 Key for switching back to the last

value or for decreasing a selected value

6 Key for confirming settings or for changing over

7 LCD display8 Key, 12 V main switch9 Key tank menu

Page 126: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

126 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

Switching on: � Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8): The 12 V living area power supply is switched on. The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) shows the basic menu and is lit up for 20 seconds. Additionally, in the event of an alarm, the relevant alarm display appears.

Switching off: � Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8): The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) lights up.

� Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8) again: The 12 V living area power supply is switched off. To confirm the entry, "12 V OFF" appears in the LCD dis-play.

Activate battery separation: � Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8): The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) lights up.

� Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8) again: The 12 V living area power supply is switched off. To confirm the entry, "12 V OFF" appears in the LCD dis-play.

� Press the battery menu key (Fig. 131,2) and hold it down for approx. 10 seconds: The icon for the living area battery will blink for approx. 5 seconds. The LCD display disappears afterwards. The living area battery is disconnected from the 12 V power supply.

Deactivate batteryseparation:

� Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8) and hold it down for approx. 5 seconds: The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) is illuminated and the symbol for the living area battery blinks.

� Set date and time (see section 9.9.3).

� Check battery voltage (see section 9.9.4).

� When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.

� Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

Page 127: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

127Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

9.9.2 LCD display

9.9.3 Basic menu

The basic menu always appears after switching on the 12 V main switch.

When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.

Calling menu: � Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1): The time and possibly other sym-bols are displayed.The symbols contain the following information:

� Defroster (Fig. 132,7) switched on or off (optional).� Switching facility for two gas bottles (Fig. 132,8) (optional): The gas

bottle symbol appears when one of the two gas bottles is empty. If the second bottle is also empty, the symbol flashes and ("ALARM") (Fig. 132,15) appears in the basic menu.

� Mains check (Fig. 132,9): The symbol appears if the vehicle is con-nected to the 240 V power supply.

Fig. 132 Symbol representation in the LCD display

1 Starter battery/living area battery/internal temperature2 External temperature3 Main display4 Information line5 Unit field6 Arrows7 Defroster (optional)8 Reserve bottle in operation (optional)9 240 V power supply is connected

10 Tank heater (optional)11 Optical display for buzzer (warning that buzzer is switched off)12 Display for defects to battery, tank level sensors or temperature sensors13 Water pump14 Solar charge (optional)15 Battery alarm or tank alarm16 Command to charge the battery17 Water tank/waste water tank level

� The arrow in the LCD display indicates that the selected menu consists of several menu pages. When the used menu-keys are pressed repeatedly, the next menu-page appears.

� 20 seconds after the last key has been pressed the basic menu always appears unlit.

Page 128: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

128 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

� Heater for waste water tank (Fig. 132,10) (optional): The symbol appears if the heater for the waste water tank is switched on.

� Water pump (Fig. 132,13): The symbol appears if the water pump is switched on.

� Press the basic menu key repeatedly or the "+" key (Fig. 131,4) to call up the following information in succession:

� Internal temperature in °C� External temperature in °C� Date (day, month)

Various settings can be made in the basic menu.

Setting the date and time: � Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1).

� Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds.

� Afterwards, press the settings menu key repeatedly until the hours display starts flashing.

� Use the "+" and "-" keys (Fig. 131,4 and 5) to change the flashing number and the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6) to confirm.

Set the minutes and the date in the same way.

Switching defroster on andoff:

� Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1).

� Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds.

� Switch on ("ON") or switch off ("OFF") the defroster with the "+" and "-" keys (Fig. 131,4 and 5) or switch to automatic mode ("AUTO") and confirm with the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6).

Displaying the softwareversion:

� Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1): The time and possibly other sym-bols are displayed.

� Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds.

� Afterwards, press the settings menu key repeatedly until a letter appears at the start of the LCD display. The software version is displayed.

9.9.4 Battery menu

When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.

Calling menu: � Press the battery menu key (Fig. 131,2): The remaining effective capacity of the living area battery (Ah or %) is displayed.

� Press the battery menu key repeatedly or the "+" key (Fig. 131,4) to call up the following information in succession:

� The temperature menu appears and the "?" flashes if the temperature sen-sors are defective or if the temperature measured lies outside of the meas-uring range of -40 °C to +60 °C.

� In automatic mode, the defroster is switched on if the external temperature is less than 7.5 °C and switched off again if the external temperature is more than 7.5 °C.

� If the defroster is switched "ON", this corresponds to the "On and heating" operating mode. The defroster then heats permanently.

� The software version can be displayed, but not adjusted.

Page 129: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

129Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

� Charging current for the living area battery (A)� Voltage of the living area battery (V)� Voltage of the starter battery (V)� Charging current of a solar installation for the living area battery� Charging current of a solar installation for the starter battery

The tables below will help you correctly interpret the battery voltage display on the panel.

� The functions for a solar installation are only present if the vehicle is equipped for it.

� To change from the Ah display to the % display: Press "OK" key (Fig. 131,6).

Battery voltage Description

Danger of totaldischarge

10.4 V or less The battery monitor immediately cuts off all power to the appliances (except for the safety/drainage valve)

11 V or more 12 V power supply can be switched off with the main switch

10.5 V to 12 V Battery alarm is triggered if the voltage falls below 12 V

The battery capacity will be set to "zero" if the voltage remains under 10.5 - 12 V

for more than 1 minute 1)

The system will be turned off if the volt-

age remains under 10.5 - 12 V 1) for more than 5 minutes

1) Depending on the current drain

12 V to 13.2 V Battery in idle condition

More than 13.2 V Battery being charged: Main charge

13.8 V constant Trickle charge voltage

14.3 V Final charge voltage (full charge)

1 h with lead acid battery

8 h with dryfill battery

Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery

Less than 12 V Totally discharged

12.3 V 50 %

More than 12.8 V Full

� Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.

Page 130: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

130 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

9.9.5 Battery alarm for the living area battery

The basic menu appears and the symbols (Fig. 132,1, 15 and 16) flash as soon as the voltage of the living area battery falls below 12 V (measured under operation) and there is the threat of a total discharge. Additionally, the voltage indicator flashes in the battery menu.

Measures: � When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V power supply.

9.9.6 Battery capacity alarm for the living area battery

The basic menu appears and the symbol (Fig. 132,1) flashes. The Ah-data and the "CHARGE!" command are also displayed in the battery menu.

9.9.7 Battery defect message for living area battery

The basic menu appears and the symbol (Fig. 132,1) flashes. The "DEFECT!" display is also displayed in the battery menu.

9.9.8 Tank menu

When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.

Calling menu: � Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9): The level of the water tank is dis-played.

� Press the tank menu key repeatedly or the "+" key (Fig. 131,4) to call up the following information in succession:

� Filling level of the waste water tank� Filling level of an addition tank (optional)

Various settings can be made in the tank menu.

Switching the water pumpon and off:

� Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9).

� Press the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6) as long as the LCD display is lit.

� Switch the water pump on or off by pressing the "OK" key again.

Switching the waste watertank heater on and off:

� Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9).

� Press the tank menu key again as long as the LCD display is lit.

� Press the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6) as long as the LCD display is lit.

� Switch the tank heater on or off by pressing the "OK" key again.

� Total discharge damages the battery.

� If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.

Page 131: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

131Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

9.9.9 Tank alarm

The basic menu appears and the symbols (Fig. 132,15 and 17) flash when the water tank is empty or the waste water tank is full. Additionally, the corre-sponding percentage indicator flashes in the tank menu.

Fill the water tank or empty the waste water tank in the event of tank alarm (see chapter 11).

When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.

Activating or deactivatingthe tank alarm:

� Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9).

� Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds. The tank settings menu is displayed.

� Switch on ("ON") or switch off ("OFF") the tank alarm with the "+" and "–" keys (Fig. 131,4 and 5) and confirm with the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6).

9.10 240 V power supply

The 240 V power supply provides electricity for:

� sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A� refrigerator� transformer/rectifier

The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area are supplied with voltage by the living area battery.

Connect the vehicle to an external 240 V power supply system as often as possible. The charger module in the transformer/rectifier automatically charges the living area battery. In addition to this, the starter battery is charged with a float charge of 2 A.

9.10.1 240 V connection

The vehicle can be connected to an external 240 V power supply. The cable may have a length of maximum 25 m.

� The tank alarm can be switched off, for example, if the water tank is con-stantly empty from using a direct water supply.

� When the tank sensors are defective, the tank menu appears and "?" flashes.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate "Control panel" instruction manual.

� Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.

� The external 240 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault current protection switch (FI-switches, 30 mA).

� For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) highly sen-sitive fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.

Page 132: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

132 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

9.10.2 Power cable for external 240 V connection

Power cable� Three-core (3 x 2.5 mm2) flexible rubber sheathed cable� Maximum 25 m in length� 1 plug with earth contact� 1 socket with earth contact (plug-in devices according to EN 60309)

Connection possibilities In order to be prepared for all connection possibilities, we recommend the fol-lowing combination:

� Adapter cable:CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 133,1) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 133,2)

� Cable reel:Socket with earth contact (Fig. 133,3) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 133,4)

� Adapter cable:CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 133,5) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 133,6)

9.11 Fuses

9.11.1 12 V fuses

The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are fused individually. The fuses are accessible at different positions in the vehicle.

� Completely unwind the cable on cable drums to prevent overheating.

Fig. 133 Connection possibilities 240 V connection

Fig. 134 Connecting an angled con-nector with socket

� When using a CEE 17 angled connector with rear socket (Fig. 134,1) only use a rubberised and sealed IP 44 socket with earth contact (Fig. 134,2). Do not use sockets without earth contact (Fig. 134,3). Danger of electrocution!

� Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied.

� Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off.

� Never bridge or repair fuses.

Page 133: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

133Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element (Fig. 135,1). If the fuse element is broken (Fig. 135,2), change the fuse.

Before changing fuses, take the function, value and colour of the relevant fuses from the following specifications. When changing fuses, only use flat fuses with the values shown below.

Fuses for the starterbattery

The fuses are located near the starter battery or near the transformer/rectifier.

For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed near the transformer/rec-tifier in the console of the driver's seat.

For vehicles built on a Ford chassis, the fuses are installed near the trans-former/rectifier.

Fig. 135 12 V fuse

1 Unbroken fuse element2 Broken fuse element

Fig. 136 Fuses for the starter battery (Fiat)

1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange2 Flat fuse for optional devices3 Flat fuse 5 A/beige

(for the right clearance light)4 Flat fuse 5 A/beige

(for the left right clearance)5 Flat fuse 2 A/grey

(for alternator D+)6 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow

(for charging line)

Fig. 137 Fuses in front of the driver's seat (Ford)

1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange(for starter battery)

2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow(for charging line of the starter bat-tery)

3 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange(for living area battery)

4 Flat fuse 2 A/grey(for battery charger sensor)

5 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow(for the refrigerator)

Page 134: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

134 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

For vehicles on a Renault chassis, the fuses are installed near the starter bat-tery under a covering between the seats.

Not illustrated: Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange (for refrigerators with automatic power selection system)

Fuses on the living areabattery

The fuses are located near the living area battery or in the driver's cabin in front of the driver's seat.

For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed in the console of the front passenger's seat.

For vehicles on a Ford chassis, the fuses are installed near the living area bat-tery or next to the driver's seat.

Fig. 138 Fuses for the starter battery (Renault)

1 Flat fuse 2 A/grey(for alternator D+)

2 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange3 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow

(for charging line)

Fig. 139 Fuses on the living area battery (Fiat)

1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange(for living area battery)

2 Flat fuse 2 A/grey(for battery charger sensor)

3 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow(for the refrigerator)

4 Jumbo flat fuse(value depending on optional device)

Fig. 140 Fuses in front of the driver's seat (Ford)

1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange(for starter battery)

2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow(for charging line of the starter bat-tery)

3 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange(for living area battery)

4 Flat fuse 2 A/grey(for battery charger sensor)

5 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow(for the refrigerator)

Page 135: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

135Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system 9

For vehicles built on a Renault chassis, the fuses are installed near the living area battery.

Thetford toilet fuse(swivel toilet)

The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.

Type of fuse: Flat fuse 3 A/purple

Changing: � Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.

� Pull out the Thetford cassette completely.

� Replace fuse (Fig. 142,1 or Fig. 143,1 ).

Thetford toilet fuse (fixedseat)

The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.

Changing: � Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.

� Remove the Thetford cassette and swing out the flap in the housing panel.

� Replace fuse (Fig. 144,1).

Fig. 141 Fuses on the living area battery (Renault)

1 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow(for the refrigerator)

2 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange(for living area battery)

3 Flat fuse 2 A/grey(for battery charger sensor)

Fig. 142 Fuse for the Thetford toilet Fig. 143 Fuse for the Thetford toilet (alternative)

Fig. 144 Fuse for the Thetford toilet

1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple

Page 136: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

136 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Electrical system9

9.11.2 240 V fuse

The 240 V connection is protected by one or several two-pole automatic circuit breakers (Fig. 145).

Position The automatic circuit breaker is in the wardrobe or under a cover in the rear area (under the slatted frame), depending on the model.

Fig. 145 240 V automatic circuit breaker

Page 137: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

137Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

10AppliancesChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle.

The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances.

Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction man-uals for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� heater� air conditioning unit� boiler� gas cooker� gas oven� microwave oven� extractor hood� refrigerator

10.1 General

The heater, boiler, cooker, refrigerator and air conditioning unit are fitted depending on the model of the vehicle.

In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the appliances and their particular features.

To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.

� The heat exchanger of the Truma hot-air heater has to be replaced after 30 years. The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be replaced after 10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an author-ised specialist workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The operator of the heater must see to it that the parts are replaced.

� For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must cor-respond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufac-turer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop.

� Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the respective appliance.

Fig. 146 Symbols for the gas isolator taps

1 Refrigerator2 Cooker3 Heater/boiler4 Oven

Page 138: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

138 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

10.2 Heater

Initial start-up When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour will occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest position. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will disappear by themselves after a while.

10.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle

10.2.2 To heat properly

Hot air distribution Several air outlet nozzles (Fig. 147) are built into the vehicle. Pipes conduct the warm air to the air outlet nozzles. Turn the air outlet nozzles in a suitable position so the air can escape as required. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dashboard and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation.

Adjusting the air outletnozzles

� Fully open: Full hot air stream� Half or partially open: Reduced hot air stream

When five air outlet nozzles are completely opened, less warm air escapes through each nozzle. However, if only three air outlet nozzles are opened, more warm air flows out of each nozzle.

� Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

� When filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the garage, never run the heater in gas operation. Danger of explosion!

� Do not operate the heater in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!

� If the awning is put up and the heater is running in gas operation, exhaust gases from the heater can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffocation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.

Fig. 147 Air outlet nozzle

Page 139: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

139Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

10.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater

Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles. The heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be oper-ated.

Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:

� Winter operation� Summer operation

It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the "Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible to heat the vehicle in this operating mode.

Selecting operating mode: � Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 148,3).

The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V main switch.

Variant: Heater with gasoperation

The heater is operated exclusively with gas.

Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required room temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the burner is switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature sensor next to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 148,6) water in the boiler is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 148,5) the heater can be operated with an empty boiler.

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler".

� Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 148,1) on the operating unit to the desired heating level.

� Set rotary switch (Fig. 148,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 148,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 148,6).

� When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the heating system.

� Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-ment.

� The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is activated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area battery, if the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of energy.

Fig. 148 Operating unit for heater/boiler

1 Temperature control knob2 Summer operation water tempera-

ture 40 °C or 60 °C3 Rotary switch4 Off5 Winter operation "Heater without

boiler"6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-

tion"8 Red indicator lamp "Fault"9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-

up phase"

Page 140: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

140 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Green indicator lamp (Fig. 148,7) is on.

The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.

Switching off: � Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 148,3) to " " (Fig. 148,4).

� Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to use up the residual heat.

Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer" operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.

Variant: Heater with gasand 240 V electrical

operation

The heater can be operated with different types of energy:

� Gas operation (Fig. 149,3)� 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 149,2) or

1800 W (Fig. 149,1)� Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels

900 W (Fig. 149,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 149,5)

The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 148) is set to winter operation).

When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-nates (Fig. 149,6).

� 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply.

� Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).

� When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.

Fig. 149 Energy selector switch for heater/boiler

1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)3 Gas operation4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(900 W)5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(1800 W)6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-

trical operation"

� Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater" instruction manual.

� For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

Page 141: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

141Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

10.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater

Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles. The heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be oper-ated.

Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:

� Winter operation� Summer operation

It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the "Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible to heat the vehicle in this operating mode.

Selecting operating mode: � Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 150,3).

The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V main switch.

Variant: Heater with gasoperation

The heater is operated exclusively with gas.

Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required room temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the burner is switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature sensor next to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 150,6) water in the boiler is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 150,5) the heater can be operated with an empty boiler.

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler".

� Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 150,1) on the operating unit to the desired heating level.

� Set rotary switch (Fig. 150,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 150,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 150,6).

� When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the heating system.

� Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-ment.

� The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is activated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area battery, if the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of energy.

Fig. 150 Operating unit for heater/boiler

1 Temperature control knob2 Summer operation water tempera-

ture 40 °C or 60 °C3 Rotary switch4 Off5 Winter operation "Heater without

boiler"6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-

tion"8 Red indicator lamp "Fault"9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-

up phase"

Page 142: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

142 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Green indicator lamp (Fig. 150,7) is on.

The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.

Switching off: � Set the rotary switch (Fig. 150,3) to " " (Fig. 150,4).

� Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to use up the residual heat.

Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer" operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.

Variant: Heater with gasand 240 V electrical

operation

The heater can be operated with different types of energy:

� Gas operation (Fig. 151,3)� 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 151,2) or

1800 W (Fig. 151,1)� Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels

900 W (Fig. 151,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 151,5)

The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 150) is set to winter operation).

When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-nates (Fig. 151,6).

� 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply.

� Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).

� When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.

Fig. 151 Energy selector switch for heater/boiler

1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)3 Gas operation4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(900 W)5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(1800 W)6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-

trical operation"

� Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater" instruction manual.

� For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

Page 143: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

143Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

10.2.5 Alde hot-water heater

The hot-water heater has been fitted below in the wardrobe.

Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:

� Display (Fig. 152,1)� Control buttons

Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:

� Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in chapter 13.

� Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.

� Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-ment.

� The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater is in operation.

� Dethleffs recommends to bleed the heating system after the initial heater operation and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 13.

� For further information, see the separate instruction manual "Alde Com-pact" and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 13.

� For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

Fig. 152 Operating unit for hot-water heater

1 LCD display2 "Back" button3 "Activate/Increase" button4 "Forward" button5 "Switch off/Decrease" button6 "System reset" button7 Lower menu line8 Information line9 Status line

10 Upper menu line

� When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to home position after two minutes.

Pos. in Fig. 152

Button Function

4 Starting operation and selecting a symbol

3 +/OnActivating the selected menu or increasing the dis-played value

5 -/OffDeactivating the selected menu or decreasing the dis-played value

2 Ending operation

6Store Re-

setResetting the system to home position or saving the set time

Page 144: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

144 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

LCD display The LCD displays are divided into four sections:

� Upper menu line (Fig. 152,10)� Status line (Fig. 152,9)� Information line (Fig. 152,8)� Lower menu line (Fig. 152,7)

Information line Details about temperatures, times and operating states or even error mes-sages are displayed as text in the Information line (Fig. 153,19).

Fig. 153 LCD displays

Pos. in Fig. 153

Symbol Signification

Upper menu line 1 On The heater is activated

2 Off The heater is switched off

3 Selection: Setting the desired temperature

4Selection: Temporarily increasing (approx. 30 min) the water temperature in the boiler from 50 °C to 65 °C

5 Selection: Heating with gas

6Selection: Heating with currentThe number in the symbol specifies the selected heat-ing level

7 Circulating pump is activated

8 240 V power supply is connected

Status line 20 Internal temperature display

9External temperature display (only when an external temperature sensor is installed)

10 e.g. Hour Day, hour and minute display when setting the time

Page 145: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

145Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Selecting the operatingmode

The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:

� Gas operation� 240 V electrical operation� Gas and 240 V electrical operation

The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.

Selecting gas operation:� Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4) until the " " symbol (Fig. 153,5) flashes.

� Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3). The gas operation is activated.

� Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves

to home position and the " " symbol lights up.

Selecting 240 V electricaloperation:

� Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4) until the " " symbol (Fig. 153,6) flashes.

� Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3) or the "-/Off" button (Fig. 152,5) until the desired output level is visible.

� Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves to home position and the " " symbol lights up.

Selecting gas and 240 Velectrical operation:

� Select gas operation and 240 V electrical operation on the operating unit.

When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.

Pos. in Fig. 153

Symbol Signification

Lower menu line 11 MenuSelection: Calling various functions such as pump op-eration or button sounds

12 Amp Not assigned

13 Auto On Selection: Starting the heater automatically

14 Selection: Setting the night temperature

15 Auto Selection: Starting the night temperature control auto-matically

16 ExtSelection: Starting the heater via remote control (only when a remote control is installed)

17 Setting the time

18 Activating the lower menu line

� Select the output level during 240 V electrical operation in such a way that it corresponds to the 240 V connection protection:

Level 1 (1050 W) at 6 A

Level 2 (2100 W) at 10 A

Level 3 (3150 W) at 16 A

� If gas and 240 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is con-nected to the 240 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only operates in 240 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient does the gas operation also automatically switch on.

� The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap are opened.

� 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply.

Page 146: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

146 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Switching on the heater: � Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4). The "Off" symbol (Fig. 153,2) flashes.

� Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3). The "On" symbol (Fig. 153,1) flashes. The heater starts automatically.

� Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves to home position and the "On" symbol lights up.

Switching the heater off: � Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4). The "On" symbol (Fig. 153,1) flashes.

� Press the "-/Off" button (Fig. 152,5). The "Off" symbol (Fig. 153,2) flashes. The heater is turned off.

� Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves to home position and the "Off" symbol lights up.

Alde heat exchanger

The heat exchanger can be used to heat the living area of the vehicle during travel without operating the hot-water heater in the living area.

The heat exchanger is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and thus has the same function as the vehicle heater.

Heat output is set with the living area's heating regulator.

The heat exchanger stop cock is located directly on the exchanger.

Turning on: � Set stop cock handle (Fig. 154,1) parallel to the pipe.

Shutting off: � Set drain cock handle (Fig. 154,1) at a right angle to the pipe.

Alde auxiliary circulatingpump

� The heat exchanger only works when the vehicle engine is running.

� If the heat exchanger is not being used (as in the summer), the heat exchanger on the stop cock should be shut off.

Fig. 154 Alde heat exchanger

� The auxiliary circulating pump works only if a heat exchanger has been installed and the hot-water heater is running.

Page 147: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

147Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

The auxiliary circulating pump (Fig. 155,1) can be used to heat the vehicle engine when parked.

The auxiliary circulating pump is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling cir-cuit and thus functions as an engine heater.

The auxiliary circulating pump switch (Fig. 156,2) is located next to the hot-water heater operating unit. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 156,1) illuminates when the pump is operated.

Setting the rotationalspeed of the circulating

pump

The rotational speed of the circulating pump can be set with the sliding switch (Fig. 157,2). At a lower rotary speed, the operating sounds of the pump are quieter.

The sliding regulator is located in the hot-water heater area.

Setting the output: � Push sliding trap (Fig. 157,1) towards the right. The output is reduced.

� Push sliding trap towards the left. The output is increased.

240 V circulating pump Depending on the equipment, the hot-water heater has an additional 240 V cir-culating pump.

If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, then it is possible to switch to the higher output of the 240 V circulating pump.

Fig. 155 Auxiliary circulating pump Fig. 156 Operating switch for auxiliary circulating pump

� The hot-water heater is equipped with a very powerful pump. Only operate the pump for approx. 5 minutes on full output when the system is emptied or the pipes are bled. Otherwise, this will increase wear; loud operating noises are the result.

Fig. 157 Rotational speed reduction switch

Page 148: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

148 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

The switch for switching between the 12 V circulating pump and the 240 V cir-culating pump is located on the hot-water heater operating unit.

Selecting the circulatingpump:

� Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4) until the "Menu" symbol (Fig. 153,11) flashes.

� Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3).

� If "OF" is displayed in the information line (Fig. 153,19), keep pressing the " " button until "PU" is displayed.

� Select the "AU" (240 V) or "12" (12 V) setting with the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3) or the "-/Off" button (Fig. 152,5).

� Exit the menu command with the "Store" button (Fig. 152,6).

10.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger

The auxiliary heat exchanger is built into the bench seat.

The auxiliary heat exchanger may be used to provide the vehicle's living area with additional heat during the journey.

The auxiliary heat exchanger is integrated into the heat circulation of the base vehicle and is therefore only in operation when the vehicle engine is running.

Switching on: � Turn the control knob (Fig. 158,1) of the flow control to the desired position. The water circulation is open.

� Turn the fan switch (Fig. 158,2) for the circulation fan in a clockwise direc-tion.

Switching off: � Turn the fan switch (Fig. 158,2) to " ".

� Turn the control knob (Fig. 158,1) of the flow control to its initial position.

� Do not operate the auxiliary heat exchanger at petrol stations. Danger of explosion!

� The fan on the auxiliary heat exchanger can be used for ventilation.

� The heat output is continuously adjusted.

Fig. 158 Operating controls for auxiliary heat exchanger

Page 149: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

149Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

10.2.7 Independent vehicle heater

The inside and the engine can be heated with the independent vehicle heater. The heating of the engine can be switched off.

The independent vehicle heater can be turned on and off manually or with a timer. The time for the heating to start can be exactly preselected from 1 minute to 24 hours. It is possible to program three switching on times, of which only one can be activated. The maximum permitted operation time is 60 minutes.

Switching on manually: � Press the button (Fig. 159,7). The heating mode is displayed by the symbol (Fig. 159,9).

Switching off manually: � Press the button (Fig. 159,7). The symbol (Fig. 159,9) goes off.

Switching on the engineheating:

� Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 159,4). Engine is preheated.

Switching off the engineheating:

� Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 159,4). Engine stays cold.

Setting the time: � Press the button (Fig. 159,2). The time setting is displayed by the symbol (Fig. 159,8).

� Set the time with the buttons (Fig. 159,3 and 6).

Programming heating start: � Press the button (Fig. 159,5).

� Set the switching on time within ten seconds, with the buttons (Fig. 159,3 and 6).

Selecting programmedswitching on time:

� Keep pressing button (Fig. 159,5) until the selected programme number (Fig. 159,1) appears in the display.

� Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger of suffocation!

� Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger of explosion!

Fig. 159 Operating unit for independent vehicle heater

Page 150: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

150 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

10.2.8 Heater for waste water tank and waste water pipes (winter comfort package)

In order to prevent waste water fittings freezing up, the waste water tank and the waste water pipes can be electrically heated separately.

When the heater is turned on, temperature sensors monitor the temperature of the waste water tank and the waste water pipes. If the temperature falls below 5 °C, the heating elements are switched on and the waste water tank and waste water pipes are heated. If the temperature rises above a certain level, the heating elements are switched off again.

The control unit (Fig. 160) is installed in the wardrobe. The control lamps on the control unit have the following meanings:

� The indicator lamp (Fig. 160,2) lights up in green: Regulation in operation.� Indicator lamp (Fig. 160,1) lights up in red: Waste water tank is heated.� Indicator lamp (Fig. 160,3) lights up in red: Waste water pipes are heated.

To turn it on and off, use the rocker switch on the panel.

10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit

The regulator for the electrical floor warming unit is located in the wardrobe.

Operating levels The electrical floor warming unit has four operating levels:

� 0 "Off"� 20 V "Low heating level"� 22 V "Medium heating level"� 24 V "High heating level"

Fig. 160 Control unit

� On models with electrical floor warming unit, never drill holes in the floor or screw in any screws. Careful with sharp objects. There is danger of a power cut or a short circuit due to damage to a heater wire.

� Do not cover the regulator. Danger of overheating!

� The electrical floor warming unit only operates if the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply.

� The output of the electrical floor warming unit alone is not sufficient to heat the living area.

Page 151: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

151Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Switching on: � Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply (see section 9.10.1).

� Turn the control knob (Fig. 161,2) to the required heating level.

Switching off: � Turn control knob (Fig. 161,2) to "0" position.

After switching off, the floor remains warm for a while, due to residual heat.

If the regulator is overloaded, the overload protection is actuated. The pin (Fig. 161,1) jumps out.

Switching on overloadprotection:

� Press the pin (Fig. 161,1) on the overload protection when the regulator is cooled.

10.3 Air conditioning unit

10.3.1 Dometic

Fig. 161 Regulator for electrical floor warming unit

� If the unit is operating, always open at least one ventilation flap.

� In the winter, vehicle heating can be supported but not replaced by the air conditioning unit.

� Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 162 Remote control

1 Symbol for automatic mode2 Symbol for cold mode3 Symbol for warm mode4 Symbol for ventilation mode5 Symbol for discharged batteries6 Time7 Temperature display8 Fan speed display9 ON/OFF button

10 Fan speed button11 "MODE" button12 "CLOCK" button13 Reset key14 Interior temperature display button

"ROOM"15 Store button "SET"16 Light button "LIGHT"(optional)17 Temperature unit change button "F/

C°" 18 Temperature decrease button "-" 19 Temperature increase button "+"20 Display

Page 152: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

152 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con-trol in the direction of the ceiling unit.

Operating modes The air conditioning unit has the following operating modes:

� Automatic� Ventilation, manual� Cooling, manual� Heating, manual

Switching on: � Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 162,9).

� Press the "Mode" button (Fig. 162,11) as often as required until the required mode (Fig. 162,1, 2, 3 or 4) is indicated on the display (Fig. 162,20).

� Use the "+" (Fig. 162,19) and "–" (Fig. 162,18) buttons to set the desired temperature.

� Use the fan speed button (Fig. 162,10) to select the desired fan level.

Switching off: � Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 162,9).

LED The LED (Fig. 163,4) on the ceiling unit (Fig. 163,1) displays the operating status of the air conditioning unit:

Air current The air current can be directed in different directions. The distribution of the air current toward the front or back is continuously adjustable.

Adjusting air current: � Align the two deflectors (Fig. 163,3 and 5) in the desired position.

� Rotate knob (Fig. 163,2) on sliding regulator in an anticlockwise direction. The sliding regulator for air distribution is released.

Fig. 163 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

Status LED Signification

Off Air conditioning unit off

Orange Air conditioning unit ready to operate

Green Air conditioning unit in operation

Red (continuous) No 240 V power connection

Red (flashes once intermit-tently)

Fault in the interior temperature gauge

Red (flashes twice intermit-tently)

Fault in the exterior temperature gauge

Page 153: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

153Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

� Slide the sliding regulator forwards or backwards to the desired position. The side on which the sliding regulator is located is closed.

� Turn the knob tight in the clockwise direction.

10.3.2 Truma

To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con-trol in the direction of the receiver.

Switching on: � Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply. The air conditioning unit is ready to operate.

� Switch on the remote control with the switch (Fig. 165,7). The green indi-cator lamp (Fig. 164,1) indicates cooling mode.

� Set the desired operating mode with the key (Fig. 165,8).

� "FAN": Only ventilation without cooling.� "COMFORT": Cooling. The fan output and the room temperature can be

set separately. The green indicator lamp in the receiver indicates the compressor is in operation and therefore cooling mode.

� Set the desired fan output and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 165,3 and 4) if necessary. The arrow (Fig. 165,9) indicates the selected setting mode.

If the temperature set on the remote control is reached, the green indicator lamp goes out, the compressor is switched off and the circulation fan con-tinues to run.

Switching off: � To switch off, press the key (Fig. 165,7) on the remote control again.

� The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 240 V power supply.

� The external 240 V power supply must be protected by a fuse of at least 3 A. It is otherwise not possible to operate the air conditioning unit properly.

Fig. 164 Receiver Fig. 165 Remote control

� An additional key switch (Fig. 164,2) is on the receiver, which can be used to switch the air conditioning unit off or on without remote control. If the air conditioning unit is switched on by means of this key switch, the operating mode set last on the remote control is automatically selected.

� Condensation accumulates on the vaporiser in cooling mode. To counter-act any formation of germs, operate the air conditioning unit about 5 to 10 minutes in the "FAN" and "HIGH" positions to dry the vaporiser.

Page 154: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

154 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Timer The air conditioning unit can be switched on or off automatically from the cur-rent time up to 15 hours in advance with the integrated timer. Pre-program-ming up to a certain time is not possible.

� To program, switch on the air conditioning unit with the key (Fig. 165,7) on the remote control.

� Set the desired operating mode and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 165,8, 3 and 4).

� Use the key (Fig. 165,5) to select the desired function (Fig. 165,1):

� "ON": Switching on� "OFF": Switching off

� Use the keys (Fig. 165,4) to select the desired switching time (1 to 15 hours). The arrow (Fig. 165,2) flashes and indicates the setting mode.

� If "ON" (switch on) was selected, the air conditioning unit must be switched off again with the remote control after the setting process. The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming.

� The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming if "OFF" (switch off) was selected. Do not switch off the air conditioning unit with the remote control.

10.4 Boiler

� To go easy on the batteries in the remote control, the infrared transmitter can be covered by hand and the remote control then switched off after the "OFF" programming. In this way no signal is transferred to the receiver and the programming is retained.

� The key (Fig. 165,6) is used to send the settings of the remote control repeatedly to the receiver.

� Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

� Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

� When filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the garage, never run the boiler in gas operation. Danger of explosion!

� Do not operate the boiler in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poi-soning and suffocation!

� The water in the boiler can be heated up to 60 °C. Risk of scalding!

� Never use boiler when empty.

� If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost.

� Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you require a large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the build-up of limescale.

� Dethleffs recommends that water from the boiler is not used as drinking water.

Page 155: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

155Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

10.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle

10.4.2 Truma Combi boiler

The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas opera-tion) or with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The boiler is switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 166). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical operation) with the energy selector switch (Fig. 168).

In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 166,3) the water is automatically heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat up until the set water temperature has been reached.

In summer operation (Fig. 166,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to either 40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. 25 minutes. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 166,5) illuminates during the boiler heating-up period.

The power supply for the appliance cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V main switch. When there is a fault, the red indicator lamp (Fig. 166,4) on the operating unit illuminates (see chapter 15).

Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 167). The safety/drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost and the heater is not switched on.

� If the awning is put up and the boiler is running in gas operation, exhaust gases from the boiler can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffo-cation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.

Fig. 166 Operating unit for heater/boiler

1 Summer operation water tempera-ture 40 °C or 60 °C

2 Rotary switch3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"4 Red indicator lamp "Fault"5 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-

up phase"

� When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/drainage valve and empty the boiler.

� At temperatures below 2 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically. Before filling the boiler, switch on the heater and wait until the temperature on the safety/drainage valve is above 6 °C. Only then can the safety/drainage valve be closed once again.

� The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by the safety/drainage valve.

� The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g. leaves, ice) at all times.

Page 156: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

156 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Variant: Boiler with gasoperation

The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.

Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is already switched on.

Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler".

� Set the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 166) to "Summer operation" (Fig. 166,1).

The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 166,5) is illuminated during the heating up period. When the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up is finished and the yellow indicator lamp fades.

Switching off: � Set the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 166) to " ".

� Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Variant: Boiler with gasand 240 V electrical

operation

Fig. 167 Safety/drainage valve of the boiler

� 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply.

� Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).

� When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.

Page 157: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

157Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:

� Gas operation (Fig. 168,3)� 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 168,2) or

1800 W (Fig. 168,1)� Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels

900 W (Fig. 168,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 168,5)

The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 166) is set to winter operation).

When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-nates (Fig. 168,6).

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Filling the boiler with water: � Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.

� Close the safety/drainage valve. Turn the knob (Fig. 167,1) perpendicular to the safety/drainage valve and press the button (Fig. 167,2) in.

� Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.

� Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.

� Close all water taps.

Emptying the boiler: � Set the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 166) to " ".

� Open the safety/drainage valve. To do this turn the knob (Fig. 167,1) par-allel to the safety/drainage valve. The snap fastener (Fig. 167,2) jumps out. The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/drainage valve.

� Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 10 litres).

Fig. 168 Energy selector switch for heater/boiler

1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)3 Gas operation4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(900 W)5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(1800 W)6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-

trical operation"

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Boiler".

Page 158: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

158 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

10.4.3 Trumatic C boiler

The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas opera-tion) or with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The boiler is switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 169). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical operation) with the energy selector switch (Fig. 171).

In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 169,3) the water is automatically heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat up until the set water temperature has been reached.

In summer operation (Fig. 169,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to either 40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. one hour. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 169,5) illuminates during the boiler heating-up period.

The voltage supply for the heater/boiler and the safety/drainage valve cannot be interrupted by the 12 V main switch. When there is a fault, the red indicator lamp (Fig. 169,4) on the operating unit for Trumatic C heater/boiler illuminates (see chapter 15).

Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 170). The safety/drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost and the heater is not switched on.

Fig. 169 Operating unit for heater/boiler

1 Summer operation water tempera-ture 40 °C or 60 °C

2 Rotary switch3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"4 Red indicator lamp "Fault"5 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-

up phase"

� When the safety/drainage valve is closed a small electrical power flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Therefore, a daily check of the battery voltage panel is recommended. If the battery voltage drops to below 10.8 V the function of the safety/drainage valve can no longer be guaranteed.

� When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/drainage valve and empty the boiler.

� At temperatures below 8 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically. Therefore, you must switch on the living area heater and wait until the living area temperature exceeds 8 °C before you fill the boiler.

� The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by the safety/drainage valve.

� The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g. leaves, ice) at all times.

Page 159: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

159Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Variant: Boiler with gasoperation

The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.

Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is already switched on.

Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler".

� Set the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 169) to "Summer operation" (Fig. 169,1).

The yellow indicator lamp is illuminated during the heating up period. When the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up is finished and the yellow indicator lamp fades.

Switching off: � Set the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 169) to " ".

� Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Variant: Boiler with gasand 240 V electrical

operation

Fig. 170 Safety/drainage valve of the boiler

� 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply.

� Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).

� When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.

Page 160: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

160 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:

� Gas operation (Fig. 171,3)� 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 171,2) or

1800 W (Fig. 171,1)� Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels

900 W (Fig. 171,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 171,5)

The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 169) is set to winter operation).

When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-nates (Fig. 171,6).

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Filling the boiler with water: � Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.

� Close the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, pull the pull switch (Fig. 170,1) up.

� Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.

� Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.

� Close all water taps.

Emptying the boiler: � Set the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 169) to " ".

� Open the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, push the pull switch (Fig. 170,1) down. The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/drainage valve.

� Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 12.5 litres).

10.4.4 Alde boiler

Switching the boiler on/off

The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not possible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 10.2.5.

Fig. 171 Energy selector switch for heater/boiler

1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)3 Gas operation4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(900 W)5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation

(1800 W)6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-

trical operation"

� Because of the suction effect, a part of the water supply can be also drained from the lines and the water tank. The water system is however not completely emptied.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Boiler".

Page 161: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

161Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Filling the boiler with water: � Close drain cock. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 172,1) horizontally.

� Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.

� Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.

� Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.

� Close all water taps.

Emptying the boiler: � Switch off boiler.

� Open all water taps and set to the central position.

� Open drain cocks (Fig. 172). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 172,1) in a vertical position. The boiler is drained to the outside using the drain cock.

� Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 12.5 litres).

10.5 Cooker

10.5.1 Gas cooker

Fig. 172 Drain cock

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Alde Compact".

� Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

� Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight.

� Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating.

� Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when han-dling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.

� During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects or highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be near the gas cooker. Fire hazard!

� The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be cov-ered by cooking pans placed on the cooker.

� Depending on the model, the gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring. When closing there is danger of getting injured!

Page 162: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

162 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker.

Depending on the model, the operating controls for the gas cooker are found on the operating panel on the refrigerator or directly on the gas cooker.

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker".

� Open the gas cooker lid.

� Turn the control knob (Fig. 173,1) on the burner you wish to use to the igni-tion position (large flame).

� Press the control knob down and hold it.

� Light the burner with a gas lighter, a match or other suitable means of lighting.

� Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to 15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open.

� Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.

� If ignition is unsuccessful, repeat the entire procedure.

Switching off: � Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades.

� Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

10.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo)

� Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob.

� Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation.

� Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed.

� Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid.

� Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Oth-erwise the glass plate could shatter.

� Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker burners.

� When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas cooker".

Fig. 173 Operating controls for gas cooker

Fig. 174 Alternative: Operating controls for gas cooker

� Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.

� There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being lit.

Page 163: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

163Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".

� Fully open the oven flap (Fig. 175,3).

� Lightly press control knob (Fig. 175,2) and set to " " (oven) or " " (grill).

� Press the control knob (Fig. 175,2) and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds. Gas will stream into the burner.

� Press the lighting switch (Fig. 175,1) repeatedly until there is a flame.

� Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to 15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open.

� Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.

Switching off: � Turn control knob (Fig. 175,2) to " ". The flame fades.

� Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

10.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic)

� The oven flap must remain open when it is being lit.

� If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary, check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.

� If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your service centre.

� If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to " " and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.

� When grilling, pull out the heat guard and leave the flap fully open.

� Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max-imum temperature without any contents.

� When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas oven".

Fig. 175 Gas oven (Spinflo)

� Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.

� There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being lit.

� If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary, check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.

Page 164: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

164 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

The oven is equipped with electronic ignition.

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".

� Gently press the control knob (Fig. 176,1) and turn left to any position.

� Press the control knob and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds. Ignition will take place automatically.

� Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.

Switching off: � Turn the control knob (Fig. 176,1) to " ". The flame fades.

� Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

10.5.4 Microwave oven

� If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your service centre.

� If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to " " and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.

� Depending on the model the gas oven may come equipped with a grill.

� Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max-imum temperature without any contents.

� When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas oven".

Fig. 176 Gas oven (Dometic)

� Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user.

� The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should never be removed.

� Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed.

� Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage.

� Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation.

� If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and interrupt the power supply.

� Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross in place.

� Use only crockery suitable for microwave use.

Page 165: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

165Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Switching on: � Open the door and place foodstuffs into the cooking area.

� Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages.

� Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 177,1).

� Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 177,2). Cooking begins.

The end of the cooking process is signalled by a signal tone. The microwave oven will switch off automatically.

Switching off: � Open the door and remove foodstuffs.

10.5.5 Extractor hood

The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The two-level fan blows the cooking steam directly outside.

� Use the switch (Fig. 178,1) to turn the extractor hood on and off.

� Use the switch (Fig. 178,2) to turn the cooker lamps on and off.

� The microwave oven only functions with correct 240 V power supply. In the case of fluctuations of the voltage or of voltage below 230 V, the microwave oven switches itself off completely. Therefore, do not switch on additional 240 V appliances when the microwave oven is in operation. Particularly in southern countries it happens that the line voltage is described as having 230 V but it really does not amount to this value. So it may happen that the microwave oven cannot be operated in these countries.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Microwave oven".

Fig. 177 Operating controls for micro-wave oven

Fig. 178 Extractor hood

Page 166: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

166 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

10.6 RefrigeratorDuring the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At high ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling power. At high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit is only guaranteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to achieve a better ventilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed.

10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill

Dometic

Removal: � Turn screw (Fig. 179,1 or Fig. 180,1) one quarter turn using a coin.

� Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.

Thetford

Removal: � Move the locking device (Fig. 181,1) to the middle.

� Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.

10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series, automatic ignition)

Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:

� Gas operation� Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)

� When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill. Otherwise water can enter during rain.

Fig. 179 Refrigerator ventilation grill (Dometic small)

Fig. 180 Refrigerator ventilation grill (Dometic large)

Fig. 181 Refrigerator ventilation grill (Thetford)

Page 167: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

167Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.

Gas operation

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-ator".

� Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 182,1) to "GAS".

� Set the control knob (Fig. 182,5) to maximum power. Gas supply is open. Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has been completed successfully. The "GAS" operating indicator (Fig. 182,3) lights up yellow.

� Adjust the refrigerating temperature with the control knob.

Switching off: � Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.

� Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Electrical operation

The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:

� 240 V AC� 12 V DC

Switching the 240 Voperation on:

� Set energy selector switch (Fig. 182,1) to "230 V". The "230 V" operating indicator (Fig. 182,2) lights up green.

� Use the control knob (Fig. 182,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.

Switching the 240 Voperation off:

� Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.

� Select only one energy source.

� Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.

� Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

� It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.

Fig. 182 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 7 series)

1 Energy selector switch2 "230 V" operating indicator3 "GAS" operating indicator4 "12 V" operating indicator5 Control knob for setting the tempera-

ture

� Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated electrically.

Page 168: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

168 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Switching the 12 Voperation on:

� Set energy selector switch (Fig. 182,1) to "12 V". The "12 V" operating indi-cator (Fig. 182,4) lights up green.

� Use the control knob (Fig. 182,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.

Switching the 12 Voperation off:

� Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.

10.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic power selection and frame heater)

Operating modes The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). The AES automatically selects the optimal energy source and regulates the refrigerator operation. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not required.

The AES selects from the following types of power:

� Solar installation 12 V� 240 V AC� 12 V DC� Gas

Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.

240 V operation If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the first priority by the AES.

12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running and the alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

� Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.

Fig. 183 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 7 series with AES and FH)

1 Frame heater (FH) button2 Indicator lamp3 Energy selector switch4 Indicator lamps5 Indicator lamps6 Control knob for setting the tempera-

ture

Page 169: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

169Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Gas operation

If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not run-ning the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the igni-tion fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by blast of wind, the ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the gas. When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 183,4) flashes red.

Change-over betweenenergy sources

When changing over between the different power sources there are forced delays built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy source the refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES. This prevents a change-over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).

Refrigerating temperaturecontrol

When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the con-trol knob (Fig. 183,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 183,5) show the selected ther-mostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set with the control knob. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of power being used.

Frame heater (FH)

High external temperatures and high humidity can cause drops of water to form on the metal frame of the freezer compartment. This is why the refriger-ator is equipped with a frame heater for the freezer compartment. If the tem-perature and humidity are high, switch on the frame heater by pressing the button (Fig. 183,1). This prevents corrosion. If the frame heater is switched on, the indicator lamp (Fig. 183,2) will be lit.

� Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

� It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.

� Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-ator".

� Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy selector switch.

� If the frame heater is switched on, it will always consume current. There-fore, switch off the frame heater if the vehicle engine is off and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.

Page 170: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

170 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Manual operation

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-ator".

� Select the energy type with the energy selector switch (Fig. 183,3). The respective indicator lamp (Fig. 183,4) lights up green.

� Adjust refrigerating temperature with the control knob (Fig. 183,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 183,5) show the selected thermostat position.

When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 183,4) flashes red.

Switching off: � Turn the energy selector switch (Fig. 183,3) to " ". No indicator lamp (Fig. 183,4) is lit.

� Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

10.6.4 Operation (Thetford)

Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:

� Gas operation� Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)

The operating mode is set with the button (Fig. 184,4) on the refrigerator panel.

Refrigerating temperaturecontrol

When turned on the refrigerator automatically selects the thermostat position selected last. This position can be adjusted manually by using the button (Fig. 184,1). The bars on the display (Fig. 184,3) indicate the selected thermo-stat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set with the button. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal oper-ating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of power being used.

� If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume cur-rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

� The refrigerator starts when it is switched on with the setting selected last.

� The display lights up for about 10 seconds as soon as a button is pressed.

� In the event of a malfunction, the display flashes in second clock pulses and an error code is displayed (see section 15.6.2).

� Select only one energy source.

� Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.

Page 171: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

171Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Gas operation

Switching on: � Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-ator".

� Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display (Fig. 184,3) lights up in blue and the current settings are displayed.

� Press the button (Fig. 184,4). The current setting of the operating mode appears on the display. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly until the gas operating mode " " appears on the display. Gas supply is open. Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has been completed successfully.

� Press the button (Fig. 184,1). The current thermostat setting appears on the display. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly until the desired setting appears on the display.

Switching off: � Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display (Fig. 184,3) is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is switched off.

� Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Electrical operation

The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:

� 240 V AC� 12 V DC

Switching the 240 Voperation on:

� Press the button (Fig. 184,2).

� Press the button (Fig. 184,4) repeatedly until the 240 V operating mode " " appears on the display.

� Press the button (Fig. 184,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting appears on the display.

� Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

� It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.

Fig. 184 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Thetford without SES)

1 Button for thermostat2 On/Off button3 Display4 Button for operating mode

� Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated electrically.

Page 172: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

172 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Switching the 240 Voperation off:

� Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is switched off.

Switching 12 V operationon:

� Press the button (Fig. 184,2).

� Press the button (Fig. 184,4) repeatedly until the 12 V operating mode " " appears on the display.

� Press the button (Fig. 184,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting appears on the display.

Switching 12 V operationoff:

� Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is switched off.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.

10.6.5 Refrigerator door locking mechanism

With some models, the refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The specifications in this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the freezer compartment.

There are two positions for locking the refrigerator door in place:

� Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in oper-ation

� Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrig-erator is switched off

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

� During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked in the closed position.

� Lock the refrigerator door in ventilation position when the refrigerator is switched off. This prevents mould forming.

Page 173: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

173Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances 10

Dometic 7 series

Opening:� Push the lock (Fig. 185,1) to the left " ".

� Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door.

Closing: � Fully close the refrigerator door.

� Push the lock (Fig. 185,1) completely to the right " ".

Locking in the ventilationposition:

� Slightly open refrigerator door.

� Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 186,1) keeps the refrigerator door in a fixed position. The refrigerator door will then stay slightly open (Fig. 186).

Dometic 7 series withseparate freezer

compartment

Opening:� Push the lock (Fig. 187,1) to the side, so that the open lock " "

(Fig. 187,3) is completely visible.

� Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.

Closing: � Fully close the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.

� Push the lock (Fig. 187,1) to the side, so that the closed lock " " (Fig. 187,2) is completely visible.

Fig. 185 Locking of the refrigerator door (Dometic 7 series)

Fig. 186 Refrigerator door in ventilation position (Dometic 7 series)

Fig. 187 Locking of the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door (Dometic 7 series with separate freezer compartment)

Fig. 188 Refrigerator door/freezer com-partment door in ventilation position (Dometic 7 series with separate freezer compartment)

Page 174: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

174 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Appliances10

Locking in the ventilationposition:

� Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.

� Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 188,1) keeps the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door in a fixed position. The refriger-ator door/freezer compartment door will then stay slightly open (Fig. 188).

Thetford

Opening: � Open the refrigerator door at the handle (Fig. 189,2). The lock (Fig. 189,1) is released automatically.

Closing: � Fully close the refrigerator door. Ensure that the lock is engaged.

Locking in the ventilationposition:

� Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.

� Slightly open refrigerator door.

� Open the lock (Fig. 190,2) and snap it into the locking catch (Fig. 190,1). The refrigerator door will then stay slightly open.

Fig. 189 Lock of refrigerator door, closed (Thetford)

Fig. 190 Refrigerator door in ventilation position (Thetford)

Page 175: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

175Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings 11

11Sanitary fittingsChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� water tank� waste water tank� complete water system� toilet compartment� toilet

11.1 Water supply, general

The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps the water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically switches on the water pump and pumps water to the tap.

The waste water tank collects the waste water. The water level in the water and waste water tanks can be checked on the panel.

Positions of the waterpumps

The submerged pumps are located in the water tank.

The pressurised water pumps (Fig. 191,1) are mounted on the outside of the water tank.

� Fill the water tank with fresh water only.

� Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. For this reason, rinse the water pipes and the water tank thoroughly with several litres of fresh water before each use of the vehicle. To do this, open all water taps. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.

� If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (Truma) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.

� The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

� Before using the water fittings, the 12 V power supply on the panel must be switched on. Otherwise the water pump will not work.

� Two different types of pump are used as water pumps depending on the model: Submerged pumps or pressurised water pumps.

Fig. 191 Pressurised water pump

Page 176: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

176 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings11

11.2 Switch for water pump (winter comfort package)

The switch for the water pump (Fig. 192,1) is installed in the water tank area.

The water pump can be switched off with this switch. This prevents the water pump from starting if the water system is empty and the water taps are opened. Otherwise, the water pump will run hot and discharge the living area battery.

11.3 Water tank

11.3.1 Fresh water filler neck with lid

The fresh water filler neck is on the right or left side of the vehicle, depending on the model.

The fresh water filler neck is labelled with the word "WASSER" (water) (Fig. 193,1 or Fig. 194,1). The cap is opened or closed using the key for the external flap locks.

Opening: � Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 193,2 or Fig. 194,2) and turn a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction.

� Remove cap.

� Fill the water tank with fresh water.

Closing: � Place the cap on the fresh water filler neck.

� Turn key one quarter turn in a clockwise direction.

Fig. 192 Switch for water pump

� The cap for the fresh water filler neck and for the fuel filler neck are very similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.

Fig. 193 Cap for the fresh water filler neck

Fig. 194 Cap for the fresh water filler neck (alternative)

Page 177: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

177Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings 11

� Remove the key.

� Check that the cap sits firmly on the fresh water filler neck.

11.3.2 Water drainage

Models with a double floor A hose line can be connected to the water drain neck under the floor of the vehicle.

The drain cock (Fig. 195,1) is fixed in the double floor. The drain cock is labelled by the word "Wasser" (water).

Models without doublefloor

All models without double floor have no drain cock.

In these models, the water is drained through a stopper in the water tank.

Remove the stopper (Fig. 196,1 or Fig. 197,1) from the drainage opening (Fig. 196,2) by pulling or unscrewing it.

11.3.3 Filling with water

To fill the water tank with fresh water, proceed as follows:

� Open the fresh water filler neck (Fig. 193).

� Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a funnel or similar for filling.

� Close the fresh water filler neck.

Fig. 195 Drain cock in the double floor

Fig. 196 Stopper Fig. 197 Stopper

� When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

Page 178: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

178 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings11

11.3.4 Draining water

Models with double floor To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:

� Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 198,2) from the water drain neck (Fig. 198,1) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.

� Open the external flap (see section 7.2).

� Mount suitable hose to the water drain neck (Fig. 198,1) or place appro-priate container under the water drain neck.

� Open drain cock (Fig. 195,1). The water will drain.

� Close the drain cock.

� Close the external flap.

� Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction.

Models without doublefloor

To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:

� Unscrew the cap on the water tank.

� Remove the stopper from the drainage opening by pulling or unscrewing it. The water will drain.

� Insert or screw in the stopper.

� Screw the cap onto the water tank.

11.4 Waste water tank

Fig. 198 Water drain neck and waste water drain neck

� In case of frost add so much anti-freeze (such as kitchen salt) to the waste water tank so that the waste water cannot freeze.

� For models with an double floor: If the living area heater is out of order, the waste water tank no longer is sufficiently protected against frost.

� Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could cause deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.

� Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or car-avan sites especially provided for this purpose.

Page 179: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

179Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings 11

11.4.1 Waste water tank (models with double floor)

With the models with a double floor, the waste water tank is heated by the hot air of the living area heater. This protects the waste water tank from frost when the living area heater is in operation.

Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is located on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.

The waste water tap (Fig. 199,2) is fixed in the double floor. The waste water tap is labelled with the word "Abwasser" (waste water).

A hose line can be connected to the waste water drain neck (Fig. 200,3).

Emptying: � Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 200,4) from the waste water drain neck (Fig. 200,3) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.

� Open the external flap (see section 7.2).

� Mount suitable hose to the waste water drain neck or place appropriate container under the waste water drain neck.

� Open the waste water tap (Fig. 199,2). The waste water will run out.

� Close the waste water tap.

� Close the external flap.

� Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction.

11.4.2 Waste water tank (models without double floor)

Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is located on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.

The square bolt for opening the waste water tap is directly accessible under the vehicle floor.

Fig. 199 Waste water tap Fig. 200 Waste water drain neck

Fig. 201 Operation of the waste water tap

Page 180: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

180 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings11

Emptying: � Place key (Fig. 201,2) onto the square bolt (Fig. 201,1).

� In order to open the waste water tap, turn the square bolt a quarter turn.

� Completely empty waste water tank.

� To close the waste water tap, turn the square bolt back as far as it will go.

11.4.3 Odour seal

In order to prevent odours occurring in the waste water system, the vehicle - depending on the model - has been equipped with odour seals (Fig. 202,1). The odour seals are installed in the waste water pipes.

Clean the odour seals every two years at the latest. To do so, unscrew and remove the bottom cover (Fig. 202,2).

11.5 Filling the water system

� For models without double floor, remove the siphon base if there is a risk of frost. This protects the siphon from freezing up.

� If the siphon base is removed and the vehicle is used: Place a suitable tank under the siphon to collect the waste water (not applicable for models with double floors).

� For motorhomes that have had "winter comfort package" special equip-ment installed in the factory, the waste water pipes are electrically heated. When the temperature drops below 5 °C, the frost protection equipment turns on automatically.

Fig. 202 Odour seal

� When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

� The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

� The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks (yellow) for emptying.

� The Alde system (heater/boiler) has one drain cock (yellow) for emptying.

� The water quantity can be monitored on the panel while the water tank is filled.

Page 181: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

181Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings 11

� Position the vehicle horizontally.

� Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.

� If necessary, switch on the water pump on the panel.

� Close the safety/drainage valve (Truma). For this pull the pull switch upwards or turn the knob perpendicular to the safety-/drainage valve and press the button in. If the temperature is below 6 °C, the safety/drainage valve cannot be closed. Therefore switch on the living area heater and wait until the tem-perature of the safety/drainage valve exceeds 6 °C.

� Close drain cocks. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 203,1) horizontally.

� If needed, set the stopper into the drainage opening of the water tank or screw it in.

� Close all water taps.

� Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a funnel or similar for filling.

� Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.

� Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.

� Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water pipes with water.

� Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it.

� Close all water taps.

� Check that the cap on the water tank is not leaking.

11.6 Emptying the water system

Fig. 203 Drain cock

� If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (Truma) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.

� If the water pump can be turned off from the panel, always turn off the water pump from the panel before you empty the water system. Otherwise the water pump runs until it overheats or the battery is empty.

� The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks (yellow) for emptying.

� The Alde system (heater/boiler) has one drain cock (yellow) for emptying.

Page 182: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

182 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings11

To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. This prevents frost damage and deposits:

� Position the vehicle horizontally.

� If necessary, switch off the water pump on the panel.

� Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel.

� Shut off the boiler (see section 10.4).

� Open drain cocks. To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 204,1) in a vertical position.

� Open the safety/drainage valve (only for Truma boiler). For this press the pull switch down or turn the knob parallel to the safety/drainage valve.

� For models with water drainage in the water tank:Unscrew the cap of the water tank.

� Open the water tank drain (see section 11.3.4).

� For models with an double floor: Remove the cap from the waste water drain neck and open the drain cock.

� Open all water taps and set to the central position.

� Hang the shower handset up in the shower position.

� Hold the water pump up until the water pipes are completely empty.

� Check whether the water tank is completely empty.

� Blow out the remaining water in the water pipes (max. 0.5 bar). To do this, remove the pipe from the water pump and blow into the pipe.

� Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter.

� Empty Thetford cassette. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter.

� Clean the water tank and then rinse it out thoroughly.

� Let the water system dry for as long as possible.

� After emptying, leave all water taps on in the central position.

� Leave all drain cocks open.

11.7 Toilet compartment

Fig. 204 Drain cock

� Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other items of equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.

Page 183: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

183Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings 11

The flip switches for the toilet compartment lighting are installed in different places in the toilet compartment depending on the model.

For example, the light switch (Fig. 205,1) of the toilet compartment is located under the bathroom cabinet.

11.8 Toilet

11.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford)

The flushing of the Thetford toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle or from its own water tank, which is integrated in the toilet.

� For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet clothing, close the washroom door and open the washroom skylight. This improves the air circulation.

� Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is able to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray.

� After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise cracks can appear in the shower tray over time.

� After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting.

� Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in the section 12.2.

Fig. 205 Light switch

� If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage tank (cassette).

� Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight of a person and could break.

� Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove the odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detri-mental effect on the sealing rubbers.

� Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

� Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping sites or caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.

Page 184: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

184 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings11

Filling the water tank: � Open the fresh water filler neck for the toilet (Fig. 206,1) above the flap for the Thetford cassette and swivel downwards.

� Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a funnel or similar for filling.

� Close the fresh water filler neck.

The toilet bowl can be moved into the optimal position.

The operating unit is located close to the toilet bowl.

Flushing: � Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, push the slide lever (Fig. 207,1 or Fig. 208,1) in an anticlockwise direction.

� For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 209,1 or Fig. 210,1).

� After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise direction.

The indicator lamp (Fig. 209,2 or Fig. 210,2) goes on whenever the Thetford cassette has to be emptied.

Fig. 206 Fresh water filler neck for toilet

Fig. 207 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling Fig. 208 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling (alternative)

Fig. 209 Flush button/indicator lamp Thetford toilet

Fig. 210 Flush button/indicator lamp Thetford toilet (alternative)

Page 185: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

185Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings 11

Emptying the water tank: � Open the sliding trap. To do this, turn the slide lever in an anticlockwise direction.

� Press the flush button until water ceases to flow into the bowl.

� Close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise direc-tion.

� Empty Thetford cassette.

Emptying the Thetfordcassette:

� Push the slide lever (Fig. 207,1 or Fig. 208,1) in a clockwise direction. The sliding trap is closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must be closed.

� Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.4 and 11.8.5.

11.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat

The flushing of the toilet is fed from the water system of the vehicle.

Flushing: � Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, turn the slide lever (Fig. 211,1) in an anticlockwise direction.

� For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 211,3).

� After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this turn the slide lever (Fig. 211,1) in a clockwise direction.

The indicator lamp (Fig. 211,2) goes on whenever the Thetford cassette has to be emptied.

Emptying: � Turn the slide lever (Fig. 211,1) in a clockwise direction. The sliding trap is closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must be closed.

� Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.4 and 11.8.5.

11.8.3 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)

The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle.

Fig. 211 Operating unit Thetford toilet

� Only flush the toilet if the toilet lid is closed.

Page 186: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

186 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings11

Putting into operation: � Turn on power supply. The yellow LED (Fig. 213,1) on the panel (Fig. 212,1) turns on for ca. 1 minute. A vacuum is generated in the system.

� If the green LED (Fig. 213,3) on the panel lights up, lift the pedal (Fig. 212,3) briefly, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 212,2) and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.

The vacuum toilet is ready for operation.

Flushing: � Close the lid of the toilet.

� Press down the pedal (Fig. 212,3) for several seconds.

� Briefly lift the pedal, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 212,2) and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.

The red LED (Fig. 213,2) lights up if the cassette must be emptied or removed.

Removing the cassette: � Remove the cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.4 and 11.8.5.

11.8.4 Removing the cassette

� Open the flap for the cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key into the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 214,1) and turn a quarter turn.

� Remove the key.

Fig. 212 Vacuum toilet Fig. 213 Vacuum toilet panel

� Flushing only functions if the green LED is lit.

� The Thetford cassette can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

Fig. 214 Flap for the Thetford cassette Fig. 215 Thetford cassette

Page 187: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

187Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings 11

� Press both push-button locks (Fig. 214,2) simultaneously with your thumb and open the flap for the cassette.

� Pull the retaining clip (Fig. 215,1) upwards and pull out the cassette (Fig. 215,2).

11.8.5 Emptying the cassette

� Take the cassette to a disposal point especially provided for this purpose. As you do this, point the drainage neck upwards.

� If necessary, turn the drainage neck upwards.

� Remove the cap of the drainage neck.

� Point the cassette with the drainage neck downwards.

� For Thetford cassettes: Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The cassette empties.

� Close the drainage neck with the cap.

� If necessary, return the drainage neck to its original position.

� Push the cassette back to its original position.

� Ensure that the cassette is secured by the retaining clip.

� Lock the flap for the cassette.

11.9 Vario toilet

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a Vario toilet. A Vario toilet can be changed with few maneuvers so that when the shower is in use, the toilet is available in its own enclosed cubicle. This protects the toilet area from water spray.

Fig. 216 Emptying the Thetford cas-sette

� Only remove the inner part of the toilet door when it is closed.

� Depending on the model, the Vario toilet is installed reverse to the one shown here. The conversion is then also done reverse to the Vario toilet shown.

Page 188: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

188 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Sanitary fittings11

11.9.1 Converting into a shower cubicle

� Push the latch (Fig. 217,1) right on the edge of the wash basin and lightly pull the wash basin. The wash basin moves forwards with the rear wall.

� Turn the wash basin and the rear wall (Fig. 218,1) in the direction indicated.

� Enter the toilet compartment and close the toilet door (Fig. 218,2) from the inside and lock.

� Put the latch (Fig. 219,1) of the toilet door in a vertical position and open the inner part of the toilet door.

� Turn the inner part of the toilet door in the direction indicated and push against the rear wall of the wash basin.

The shower compartment is completely set up and can be used.

11.9.2 Conversion to toilet compartment

� Turn the inner part of the toilet door and to close, place the latch (Fig. 219,1) in a horizontal position.

� Return the wash basin and the rear wall to the initial position and lock.

Fig. 217 Vario toilet, locking the shower wall

Fig. 218 Vario toilet

Fig. 219 Vario toilet, toilet door

Page 189: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

189Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care 12

12CareChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� exterior of the vehicle� interior� extractor hood� toilets� winter operation

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out if you are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time.

The checklist address the following topics:

� temporary lay-up� winter lay-up� start-up after a lay-up

12.1 External care

12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner

Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the oper-ating instructions of the high-pressure cleaner.

When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the cleaning nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm.

Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle with pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high-pressure cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 °C. Keep the jet of water in constant movement during the washing process. Do not direct the water jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the ventilation grill or the skylights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may enter the interior.

12.1.2 Washing the vehicle

� Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose.Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures.

� Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm water, dish washing liquid and soft cloth.

� Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush. In the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water.

� Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner.

� Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be damaged.

� Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pres-sure cleaner. The external applications could come off.

� Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator grills, the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the forced ventilations. The vehicle could be damaged.

Page 190: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

190 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care12

� Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow and the sealing of the surface remains intact.

� Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc.

� Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.

12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass

Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.

12.1.4 Underbody

The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody protection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately. Do not treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.

12.1.5 Waste water tank

Clean the waste water tank after every use of the vehicle.

Cleaning: � Empty the waste water tank.

� Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water.

� If possible, clean waste water sensors through the cleaning opening by hand.

12.1.6 Entrance step

If the entrance step is lubricated, coarse particles of dirt can settle on the lubri-cant during the journey and cause damage to the operating mechanism of the entrance step. Therefore, do not lubricate the moving parts of the entrance step.

� Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the surface!

� Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish washing liquid and a soft cloth.

� Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-con-taining additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks may result from their use.

� Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone-removing agents) with acrylic glass.

� Do not clean vehicle in car wash.

� Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows.

� Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water.

� Treat rubber seals with glycerin.

� An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up treatment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

� Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers and service centres will be happy to advise you.

Page 191: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

191Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care 12

12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I)

Clean the insulation mat for the driver's cabin with clear, lukewarm water. Remove heavier soiling with a cloth and some white spirits. Afterwards, imme-diately rinse the cleaned area with lukewarm water.

12.2 Interior care

� Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and living area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser may be added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted surfaces.

� Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on upholstery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery. Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it does not loose its colour.

� Clean the imitation leather coverings by wiping them off in circular motion with a soft cloth or sponge and a mixture of lukewarm water and mild lather. Treat stubborn stains with a soft brush. For very hard-to-remove stains, use a mixture of alcohol and water mixed in a 1:1 ratio. Afterwards, wipe it off with soap water. Do not use any products that contain solvents or abra-sives.

� Wipe off Teflon coverings with an absorbent cloth or sponge and use a mild household detergent.Never rub wet or oily stains. Instead, dab them with an absorbent cloth. Work from the outside to the inside to prevent spreading the stain.When treating solid or dried stains, always try to scrape them off with a dull knife or scraper or remove them off with a soft brush. Afterwards, dab off any residue with a moist cloth.

� Curtains and net curtains should be dry cleaned.

� Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo.

� If possible, treat stains immediately.

� Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see section 12.1.3).

� Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or scourers containing sand. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness and formation of cracks.

� Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling water directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water cause damage to drainage pipes and siphon traps.

� Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or for decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause damage to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying products for decalcification.

� Save water. Mop up all remaining water.

� Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.

� For information about the use of maintenance products, our representa-tives and service centres will be glad to advise.

Page 192: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

192 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care12

� Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do not place carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor covering may stick together.

� Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which may cause scratching or grooves.

� Clean gas cooker only with a moist cloth. Prevent any water from pene-trating the gas cooker. Water may damage the gas cooker.

� Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner.

� Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 °C (curd soap).

� Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attach-ment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 °C (curd soap).

� Unrolled seat belts can be cleaned with warm soapsuds. The seat belt must be completely dry before being rolled up.

� Clean water tank with water and dish washing liquid and rinse subse-quently with plenty of fresh water.

12.3 Extractor hood

Clean the extractor hood filter occasionally. How often cleaning is necessary depends on how often the extractor hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter until the performance of the extractor hood has noticeably decreased.

Cleaning the filter: � Pull down the filter (Fig. 220,2) with the handle (Fig. 220,1).

� Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.

� Let the filter dry completely and re-install.

12.4 ToiletsIf the toilet will not be used for a longer period of time, for example for Winter lay up, the toilet must be cleaned and completely emptied.

� Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.

Fig. 220 Extractor hood

Page 193: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

193Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care 12

12.4.1 Toilet with separate water tank

Emptying the tank: � Press the flush button, to active the operating panel.

� Open the sliding trap and flush until no more water flows.

� Close the sliding trap.

� Empty the cassette (Fig. 221,2) at a disposal station authorized for this pur-pose and clean it.

� Leave the drainage neck (Fig. 221,3) open.

� Remove the drain hose (Fig. 221,5) from the holder (Fig. 221,4).

� Place a sufficiently large container under the drain hose.

� Remove the drain plug (Fig. 221,1) and let the residual water run out.

� When no more water flows out, place the drain plug in the drain hose.

� Replace the drain hose in the holder.

12.4.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)

Emptying valve: � Empty the entire water system.

� Press the toilet pedal several times, until no more water flows.

� Empty the cassette at a disposal station authorized for this purpose and clean it.

� Turn off power supply.

� Remove cover (Fig. 222,3).

� Unscrew the cap (Fig. 222,2).

� Place a suitable container under the valve (Fig. 222,1).

Fig. 221 Toilet water tank drain hose

� A backflow preventer is installed above the valve. The backflow preventer hinders water from running out of the valve. Press the pedal until no more water runs out.

Fig. 222 Vacuum toilet valve

Page 194: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

194 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care12

� Press the pedal several times until water no longer comes out of the valve.

� Screw the cap back on and attach cover.

12.5 Winter careDe-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We recommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime. Mechanical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular strain, and should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.

12.5.1 Preparations

� Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as neces-sary.

� Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation system and the heater.

� Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody.

� Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.

12.5.2 Winter operation

During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and avoid vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.

� When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and roof storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures optimal ventilation.

� In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp areas.

12.5.3 At the end of the winter season

� Thoroughly clean the underbody of the vehicle and the engine. When this is done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are removed.

� Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces.

� If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15 °C. In the case of extreme external temperatures, the furniture flaps and doors should be left slightly open. The inflowing warm air can help prevent the freezing of water pipes, for example, and counteract the formation of con-densation in the storage spaces.

� If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with winter insulation mats.

� If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off.

Page 195: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

195Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care 12

12.6 Lay-up

12.6.1 Temporary lay-up

Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the vehicle. This is especially true if the animal remains undisturbed in a parked vehicle.

The animals can get into the vehicle at an opportune moment and hide from view.

To keep damages from animals to a minimum or to avoid them altogether, reg-ularly check the vehicle for damage or animal traces. This is especially impor-tant approx. 24 hours after parking the car in storage.

If animal traces are found, contact your authorised dealer or service centre. If damage to cables has occurred, they can result in short circuits. The vehicle could catch fire.

Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:

� If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

� Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time.

� Animal damage to cables can lead to short circuits. Fire hazard!

Activities Done

Base vehicle Completely fill fuel tank. This prevents corrosion damage within the fuel tank system

Jack up vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move ve-hicle every 4 weeks. This prevents any pressure points from occur-ring on tyres and wheel bearings

Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of forma-tion of cracks!

Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure

Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area

� Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.

In addition observe the notes in the operating manual of the base ve-hicle

Body All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other openings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This prevents animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry

Interior Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover

Clean refrigerator

Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly open

Search for traces of animals that have gained entry

Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove it from the vehicle

Page 196: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

196 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care12

12.6.2 Winter lay-up

Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:

Gas system Close regulator tap on the gas bottle

Close all gas isolator taps

Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if they are empty

Electrical system Fully charge living area and starter battery

� Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.

Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply

Water system Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the water pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central posi-tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve and all drain cocks open. Ob-serve the notes in chapter 11

Switch off the safety/drainage valve on the transformer/rectifier. Oth-erwise the battery will become discharged too quickly

� If the safety/drainage valve is switched off, the water system is no longer sufficiently protected against frost.

Activities Done

Activities Done

Base vehicle Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or protect with varnish

Fill fuel tank with winter diesel

Check antifreeze in the cooling water

Rectify damage to the paintwork

Body Keep the forced ventilation open

Clean and lubricate the mounted steady legs

Clean and grease all door and flap hinges

Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms

Rub all rubber seals with talc

Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders

Interior Position de-humidifiers

Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place

Air the interior every 3 weeks

Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and drawers

Thoroughly clean the interior

If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle

Page 197: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

197Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care 12

12.6.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay-up over winter

Go through the following checklist before start-up:

Electrical system Remove starter and living area batteries and store in a place protect-ed from frost (see chapter 9)

Water system Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised store

Complete vehicle Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings are not covered, or use porous tarpaulins

Activities Done

Activities Done

Base vehicle Check the tyre pressure on all tyres

Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel

Body Clean the pivot bearing of the entrance step

Check the functioning of the fitted steady legs

Check that the windows and skylights are working properly

Check that all the external locks are working, such as the external flaps, the filler neck and the conversion door

Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is one)

Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)

Gas system Put the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and con-nect to the gas pressure regulator

Electrical system Connect to 240 V power supply using the external socket

Fully charge living area and starter battery

� Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.

Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply (see chapter 9)

Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, sock-et and all installed electrical appliances

Water system Use several litres of fresh water to rinse out water pipes and water tank. To this end, open all water taps

Check the functionality of the operating lever for the waste water tank

Close safety/drainage valve, drain cocks and water taps

Check the safety/drainage valve, water taps, drain cocks and water distributors for leaks

Page 198: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

198 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Care12

Appliances Check the function of the refrigerator

Change heating fluid of the hot-water heater every 2 years

Check the function of the heater/boiler

Check the function of the gas cooker

Check the function of the air conditioning unit

Activities Done

Page 199: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

199Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance 13

13MaintenanceChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work concerning the vehicle.

The maintenance instructions address the following topics:

� Alde hot-water heater � independent vehicle heater� air conditioning unit� replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes � AL-KO rear axle

At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain spare parts.

13.1 Inspection workLike any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular inter-vals.

This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel.

Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of this instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel possessing this technical knowledge are available for assistance at all Dethleffs service cen-tres. Their experience and regular technical instruction by the factory as well as equipment and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspection of the vehicle.

The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed.

Have chassis inspections confirmed in the chassis manufacturer's customer service booklet.

13.2 Maintenance workAs with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and fre-quency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation and use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the vehicle more often.

Have the base vehicle and the appliances serviced at the intervals specified in the corresponding instruction manuals.

13.3 Alde hot-water heater

� Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them car-ried out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus pre-served.

� The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in the event of damage and guarantee claims.

� Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir.

� During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling level may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the heating fluid.

� We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera-tion and to check the glycol content.

Page 200: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

200 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance13

13.3.1 Checking the fluid level

� Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.

� Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 223,3) and "MAX" (Fig. 223,2) on the compensator reservoir (Fig. 223).

13.3.2 Topping up heating fluid

� Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles.

� Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.

� Unscrew or pull off the panel.

� Open the rotary lid (Fig. 223,1) on the compensator reservoir.

� Slowly remove cover with circulating pump upwards.

� Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection con-tent must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 °C.

� Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.

� Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at intervals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after some time.

� Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mix-ture offers frost protection up to approx. -25 °C. When topping up hot-water heaters that are connected to the engine's cooling circuit, please observe the instructions in the instruction manuals of the manufacturers.

� Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Alde Compact" heater.

Fig. 223 Compensator reservoir hot-water heater

� The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator res-ervoir is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark.

Page 201: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

201Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance 13

13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system

The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators.

� Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.

� Open bleeding valve (Fig. 224,1) and leave open until no more air escapes.

� Close bleeding valve.

� Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves.

� Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.

13.4 Independent vehicle heaterUse the independent vehicle heater for 10 minutes at least once a month with a cold engine and smallest fan settings.

Before the heating season starts, have the independent vehicle heater checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

13.5 Air conditioning unit

Fig. 224 Bleeding valve of hot-water heater

� Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.

� Never operate the air conditioning unit without a lint filter. Without a lint filter, the vaporiser becomes dirty and the capacity of the air conditioning unit is consequently impaired.

� Condensation can enter the vehicle if the condensation drain is clogged up. Keep the condensation drain free from dirt, leaves and similar.

Page 202: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

202 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance13

13.5.1 Truma

A lint filter (Fig. 225,1) for the air circulation suction system is at the front of the air conditioning unit. The lint filter must be cleaned at regular intervals, at least twice a year however, and replaced if necessary.

The condensation drain is under the floor of the vehicle. Keep the drain hose free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.

13.5.2 Dometic

A lint filter and an activated carbon filter are each located in the lower part of the air conditioning system ceiling unit (Fig. 226,2) behind the ventilation grills (Fig. 226,1 and 3). The lint filters must be cleaned at regular intervals and replaced if necessary. The manufacturer recommends replacing the activated carbon filter yearly.

On the left side of the ceiling unit (outside of the vehicle) is located the drainage opening for the condensation. Keep the drain openings free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.

13.6 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes

Fig. 225 Air conditioning unit (Truma)

Fig. 226 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

� Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to cool down before changing bulbs.

� Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 240 V fuse box before changing bulbs.

� Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children.

Page 203: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

203Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance 13

13.6.1 Ceiling lamp (cover with screws)

Changing bulbs: � Undo the screws (Fig. 227,1) and carefully remove the glass cover (Fig. 227,2).

� Remove bulb.

� Put in a new bulb.

� Fasten the glass cover again.

13.6.2 Ceiling lamp

Changing bulbs: � Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to carefully lever out the cover (Fig. 228,2) at the notch (Fig. 228,1) and remove it.

� Remove bulb.

� Put in a new bulb.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

� Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in its glass. The bulb might burst.

� Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard!

� A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when installing the new bulb.

� Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage.

Fig. 227 Ceiling lamp

Fig. 228 Ceiling lamp

Page 204: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

204 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance13

13.6.3 Halogen spotlight (with glass shade)

Changing bulbs: � Pull the halogen bulb (Fig. 229,1) forward out of the socket.

� Press the new halogen bulb into the fitting between the two spring tongues.

13.6.4 Halogen spotlight (movable)

Changing bulbs: � Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 230,1).

� Carefully remove the lamp chalice (Fig. 230,2) from the holder.

� Remove halogen bulb.

� Put in a new halogen bulb.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.6.5 Room lamp

Changing bulbs: � Unscrew the cap (Fig. 231,1).

� Remove cover (Fig. 231,2).

Fig. 229 Halogen spotlight (with glass shade)

Fig. 230 Halogen spotlight (movable)

Fig. 231 Room lamp

Page 205: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

205Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance 13

� Press the light covering (Fig. 231,3) lightly together and remove it.

� Remove the fluorescent tube.

� Insert a new fluorescent tube.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.6.6 Living area lamp

Changing bulbs: � Remove the screw (Fig. 232,1) and take off the cover (Fig. 232,2).

� Press the glass together gently and remove from the housing.

� Remove the fluorescent tube.

� Insert a new fluorescent tube.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.6.7 Recessed halogen light with housing

The recessed halogen light is installed flush in a housing (Fig. 233,1).

Changing bulbs: � Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 233,3) from the housing.

� Remove the cover ring with the glass.

� Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 233,2).

� Put in a new halogen bulb.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

Fig. 232 Living area lamp

Fig. 233 Recessed halogen light

Page 206: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

206 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance13

13.6.8 Recessed halogen light (flat)

The recessed halogen light (Fig. 234,1) is installed flush with the panel.

Changing bulbs: � Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 235,1) from the housing.

� Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ring with the glass (Fig. 235,2) from the lower section of the recessed halogen light.

� Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 235,3).

� Put in a new halogen bulb.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.6.9 Surface-mounted halogen light driver's cabin (model I)

Changing bulbs: � Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to carefully lever out and remove the glass cover (Fig. 236,1).

� Remove halogen bulb.

� Put in a new halogen bulb.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

Fig. 234 Recessed halogen light (flat) Fig. 235 Changing the halogen bulb

Fig. 236 Surface-mounted halogen light driver's cabin (model I)

Page 207: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

207Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance 13

13.6.10 Wardrobe light

Changing bulbs: � Press the light covering (Fig. 237,1) lightly together and remove it.

� Remove halogen bulb.

� Put in a new halogen bulb.

� Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.7 Changing the battery of the wardrobe light with LEDThe wardrobe light has a button cell that supplies voltage to the LED.

Changing the battery: � Carefully push back the retaining clip (Fig. 238,3) on the top side of the wardrobe light (Fig. 238,5). This exposes the nose (Fig. 238,4) on the retaining clip.

� Pull the battery holder (Fig. 238,2) out at the top.

� Take the button cell (Fig. 238,1) out of the battery holder.

� Insert new button cell of the same type (+/-), observing the correct polarity.

� Insert the battery holder with the retaining clip to the rear of the housing and push it downwards until the nose snaps into place.

Fig. 237 Wardrobe light

� Use only button cells of the same type.

Fig. 238 Wardrobe light with opened battery compartment

Page 208: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

208 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance13

13.8 AL-KO rear axle

Fiat vehicles with AL-KOrear axle without

pneumatic spring

In addition to the regulations and notes in the operator manual of the basic vehicle as well as in the maintenance manual, the rear axles must be relubri-cated after 20,000 km, or at least every 12 months.

The lubricator nipples (Fig. 239, arrow) are situated on the underside of the axle tube.

13.9 Spare parts

For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an author-ised specialist workshop. Our Dethleffs dealers and service centres are avail-able for any spare parts requirement.

� The rear axles must not bear any load while they are being lubricated.

� Use one of the following types of grease for lubrication:

Costrac GL 1501 by the firm Klüber

Cardex 3746 SP by the firm CONDA

� If the vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free torsion bar spring axle or a rear axle with pneumatic cushioning, the two lubricator nipples are left out.

Fig. 239 AL-KO rear axle

� Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety.

� The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by Dethleffs have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle. These products are available at your Dethleffs dealer. The Dethleffs dealer is informed about admissible technical details and carries out the required work correctly.

� The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.

� No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-ations to the vehicle.

Page 209: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

209Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance 13

Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:

� Fuses� V-belt� Windscreen blades� Bulbs� Water pump (submerged pump)

When ordering spare parts please indicate the serial number and the vehicle type to the Dethleffs dealer.

The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use. When fitting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in the vehicle documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. Your Dethleffs dealer will be pleased to advise you.

13.10 Vehicle identification plate

The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 240) with the serial number is mounted in the entrance area.

Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:

� Identifies the vehicle� Helps with the procurement of spare parts� Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner

Fig. 240 Vehicle identification plate

1 Type2 Maximum permissible gross weight

of the vehicle with trailer3 Manufacturer of the unit (add-on

unit)4 Manufacturer's code and chassis

number5 EG type approval number6 Permissible rear axle load (for

tandem axle)7 Permissible axle load rear8 Permissible axle load front9 Maximum permissible gross weight

of the vehicle10 Serial number

Fig. 241 Cover for chassis number (Fiat base vehicle)

� Always include the serial number with all inquiries for the customer service office.

� For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the chassis number is located behind a cover (Fig. 241,1) in the entrance on the front passenger's side.

Page 210: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

210 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Maintenance13

13.11 Warning and information stickersThere are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning and information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.

� Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a service centre.

Page 211: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

211Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Wheels and tyres 14

14Wheels and tyresChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

� tyre selection� handling of tyres� changing wheels� spare wheel support� tyre pressure

At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre pressure for your vehicle.

14.1 General

Observe: � Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth and external damage.

� Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by law is reached.

� Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer and winter tyres).

� Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The approved wheel rim and tyre sizes are listed in the vehicle documents; your Dethleffs dealer or the dealer for the base vehicle will be pleased to advise you.

� Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only then do they reach full strength.

� Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

� Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.

� Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in these tyres.

� Read the instruction manual for the base vehicle.

� Fiat- and Ford-based vehicles are equipped with only one tyre repair kit as standard.

� In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle safe with a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights.

� Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle over time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date of manufacture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits the year of manufacture.

Example: Week 15, year of manufacture 2007.

Page 212: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

212 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Wheels and tyres14

� Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise (Fig. 242) after 50 km (30 miles).

� When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to 3,000 miles).

� For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings free from pressure points:Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the vehicle every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is changed.

14.2 Tyre selection

The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or can be got from the Dethleffs dealers. Each tyre must fit the vehicle on which it will be driven. This applies to the external dimensions (diameter, width), which are indicated with the standardised size designations. In addition, the tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle with regard to weight and speed.

Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed on two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its load index (= LI, load index code).

The axle geometry of a vehicle, such as wheel camber and track, is also important for tyre selection. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with full load-carrying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together, load index and speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official component of the complete, standardised dimensions description which appears on every tyre. The information on the tyres must correspond to the specifications which appear in the vehicle papers.

Fig. 242 Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise

� A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause it to burst.

� If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type approval for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can lapse. Your Dethleffs dealer will be pleased to advise you.

Page 213: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

213Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Wheels and tyres 14

14.3 Tyre specifications

14.4 Handling of tyres

� Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured.

� Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured.

� Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers significantly increases wear.

� If the tread wear is uneven, have the toe-in and the wheel camber checked. Driving with an incorrectly set toe-in or a one-sided wheel camber leads to a significant increase in wear.

� Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unserviceable.

� Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer serious damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result.

14.5 Changing wheels

Description Explanation

215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q 215 Tyre width in mm

70 Height-to-width proportion in percent

R Tyre design (R = radial)

15 Rim diameter in inches

C Commercial (transporter)

109 Load index code for single tyres

107 Load index code for twin tyres

Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)

� The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping.

� Go into first gear. In the case of automatic transmission, change gear to "P" position.

� Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake.

� Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel with the wheel chocks.

� Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports.

� If a trailer is connected: Detach the trailer before lifting the vehicle.

� Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circum-stances on the bodywork.

� Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is spec-ified on the vehicle jack's identification plate.

� Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the tyre.

Page 214: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

214 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Wheels and tyres14

14.6 Spare wheel support

The spare wheel is found on the underside of the vehicle in a basket which can be opened from the outside.

14.6.1 Spare wheel support under the vehicle (Renault)

� Do not start the motor while the vehicle is jacked up.

� Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down under it.

� Do not damage the thread of the thread bolts when changing the wheel.

� Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 242).

� When changing wheels (e.g. alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres), use the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. The firm seating of the wheels and the function of the braking system depend on this.

� Wheel rims and tyres not permitted for use with the vehicle can jeopardize road safety.

� Do not replace wheels cross-wise.

� Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard warning triangle.

� Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre load and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre sizes stated in the vehicle documents.

� Further information can be found in the instruction manual of the base vehicle.

� For models with a Fiat or Ford base vehicle, there is no spare wheel. For these vehicles, a tyre repair kit is included for inflating the flat tyre with foam.

� Due to its weight and fitted position, the spare wheel can be raised or lowered by a very strong person only. Always get a second person to assist.

Page 215: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

215Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Wheels and tyres 14

Removing the spare wheel: � Use the ratchet wrench and extension to loosen the nuts (Fig. 243,1) on the rear hooks (Fig. 243,2) to the left and right of the spare wheel support.

� Unscrew the wheel nuts approx. 3 to 4 cm.

� Press the clip (Fig. 243,3) slightly upwards, press the hooks backward or forward and unhook the clip.

� Take down the basket and remove the spare wheel.

14.7 Tyre pressure

The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pres-sure. Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres.

As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate of 0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst, check the tyre pressure regularly.

Fig. 243 Spare wheel support under the vehicle

� Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious tyre damage.

� Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

� Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.

� Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.

� The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehi-cles.

� Pressure in hot tyres must be 0.3 bar higher than in cold tyres. Recheck the pressure when the tyres are cold.

� Tyre pressures in bar.

� The valve used must be approved for the air pressure. Dethleffs recom-mends the use of a metal valve for pressures greater than 4.75 bar.

� The tyre pressure tolerance is +/- 0.05 bar.

� For the maximum permissible axle loads for your vehicle please refer to specific documentation.

� When a replacement is needed, Dethleffs recommends "Michelin-Camping" tyres.

Page 216: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

216 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Wheels and tyres14

The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is possible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case, the Dethleffs dealer will be happy to provide the newest values.

Types Tyre size Front air pressure in bar

Rear air pressure in bar

Fiat All types 215/70 R 15 C (109/107) Q

4.1 4.5

All types with "Michelin Camping" tyres

215/70 R 15 C (109/107) Q

5.0 5.5

All types 225/75 R 16 C (116/114) R

4.5 5.0

All types with "Michelin Camping" tyres

225/75 R 16 C (116/114) R

5.5 5.5

All types 225/75 R 16 C (116/114) Q (tandem axle)

4.5 3.5

All types with "Michelin Camping" tyres

225/75 R 16 C (116/114) Q (tandem axle)

5.5 3.5

Renault All types 225/65 R 16 C (112/110) Q

3.8 4.4

All types with "Michelin Camping" tyres

225/65 R 16 C (112/110) Q

4.5 5.5

Ford All types 215/75 R 16 C (113/111) Q

3.7 4.9

185/75 R 16 C 104/102 R (twin tyres)

4.7 3.3

Page 217: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

217Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting 15

15TroubleshootingChapter overviewThis chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle.

The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies.

The instructions address the following topics:

� braking system� electrical system� gas system� gas cooker� gas oven� microwave oven� heater� boiler� refrigerator� air conditioning unit� water supply� toilet� body

The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great deal of specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this instruction manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist work-shop must find and eliminate the cause of the fault.

15.1 Braking system

15.2 Electrical system

� Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-ised specialist workshop.

� When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type. A dryfill battery may only be replaced by a dryfill battery.

� See chapter 9 for changing the fuses.

Fault Cause Remedy

Road light system does no longer work correctly

Bulb is defective Unscrew cover of the rel-evant light, replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications

Fuse on the transformer/rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Interior lighting does not work

Bulb is defective Remove cover, replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications

The electrically operated entrance step cannot be moved in or out

Fuse on the transformer/rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Page 218: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

218 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting15

No 240 V power supply despite connection

240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 240 V au-tomatic circuit breaker

Starter or living area bat-tery is not charged when operated in 240 V mode

Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on the starter or living area battery is defective

Replace jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on the starter or living area battery

Charger module in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Living area battery is not charged during vehicle operation

Fuse on terminal D+ of the alternator is defective

Replace fuse

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V indicator lamp does not light up

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup-ply on

Battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier is switched off

Set battery cut-off switch to on

Starter or living area bat-tery is not charged

Charge the starter or liv-ing area battery

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Flat fuse (2 A) on the liv-ing area battery is defec-tive

Replace flat fuse (2 A) on the living area battery

No LCD display 12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup-ply on

Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supply

Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply

Starter or living area bat-tery is not charged

Charge the starter or liv-ing area battery

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V power supply does not work

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup-ply on

Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supply

Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply

Living area battery is dis-charged

Charge the living area battery

Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on the living area battery is defective

Replace jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on the living area battery

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Page 219: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

219Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting 15

12 V power supply does not work in 240 V opera-tion

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup-ply on

Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supply

Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply

Charger module in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Contact customer service

Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on the living area battery is defective

Replace jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on the living area battery

Starter battery is dis-charged in 12 V opera-tion

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supply

Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply

No voltage is supplied by the living area battery

Living area battery is dis-charged

Charge living area bat-tery immediately

� Total discharge damages the battery.

If the vehicle is to be laid up for a long period, fully charge the living area battery beforehand

Extractor hood does not work

240 V automatic circuit breaker is switched off

Switch on the 240 V au-tomatic circuit breaker

12 V supply device switched off

Switch on 12 V supply device on the panel

Power pack is defective Contact customer service

Fuse (15 A) on the 240 V fuse box is defective

Replace fuse (15 A)

Fuse (15 A) on the trans-former/rectifier is defec-tive

Replace fuse (15 A)

Extractor hood defective Contact customer service

Air conditioning unit can-not be switched on or off

240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 240 V au-tomatic circuit breaker

Remote control battery is empty

Change remote control battery

Fault Cause Remedy

Page 220: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

220 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting15

15.3 Gas system

15.4 Cooker

15.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven

15.4.2 Microwave oven

� In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.

� If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).

� Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.

Fault Cause Remedy

No gas Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle

Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap

Regulator tap on the gas bottle is closed

Open regulator tap on the gas bottle

External temperature is too low (-42 °C for pro-pane gas, 0 °C for bu-tane gas)

Wait for higher external temperatures

Built-in appliance is de-fective

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Ignition fuse does not op-erate (flame does not burn after the control knobs are released)

Heat-up time is too short Keep control knob pressed for approx. 15 to 20 seconds after ignition

Ignition fuse is defective Contact customer service

Flame extinguishes when being reduced to its mini-mum setting

Thermocouple sensor is incorrectly set

Correctly reset thermo-couple sensor (do not bend). The sensor tip should protrude by 5 mm beyond the burner. The sensor neck should not be more than 3 mm away from the burner ring; if necessary, contact cus-tomer service

� Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user.

Page 221: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

221Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting 15

15.5 Heater/boilerIn the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance.

15.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma

Fault Cause Remedy

Microwave oven does not cut in

Fuse is defective Replace fuse

Door of the microwave oven is not properly closed

Remove foreign bodies stuck in the door of the microwave oven and close door properly

Fault Cause Remedy

Heating does not ignite Temperature sensor on operating unit or remote sensor defective

Pull out plug on operating unit. The heating then works without thermostat. Contact the customer service as soon as possi-ble

Red indicator lamp "Fault" illuminates

Air in the gas pipe sys-tem

Switch off and on again. After two futile ignition at-tempts, wait for 10 minutes before trying again

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Defect of a safety ele-ment

Contact customer service

Red indicator lamp "Fault" is flashing

Operating voltage too low Charge or replace the liv-ing area battery (or have it charged or replaced)

Green indicator lamp be-hind knob is not lit

Fuse on the transformer/rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Fuse in the electronic control unit has been trig-gered

Contact customer service

Living area battery defec-tive

Charge or replace the liv-ing area battery (or have it charged or replaced)

Yellow indicator lamp on the energy selector switch does not illumi-nate

No supply voltage Check 240 V connection and fuses

Overheating switch was triggered

Press overheating switch

Page 222: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

222 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting15

15.5.2 Alde heater/boiler

15.6 RefrigeratorIn the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance.

Boiler empties, safety/drainage valve has opened

Internal temperature be-low 8 °C

Heat inside

Safety/drainage valve separated from battery supply

Cancel battery separa-tion

Operating voltage below 10.8 V

Charge or replace the liv-ing area battery (or have it charged or replaced)

Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Safety/drainage valve does not close when switching on

Safety/drainage valve separated from battery supply

Cancel battery separa-tion

Operating voltage below 10.8 V

Charge living area bat-tery (or have it charged)

Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Red and green indicator lamps are not lit

Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Fan wheel runs noisily or not steadily

Fan wheel is soiled Contact Truma service department

Fault Cause Remedy

Heating does not ignite with gas operation

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Heating does not ignite at 240 V electrical operation

No 240 V power supply Switch on the 240 V au-tomatic circuit breaker

Connect 240 V power supply

Heating running, but no heat at the convectors

Circulating pump does not work

Switch on room thermo-stat

Contact customer service

Heating and circulating pump running, but no heat at the convectors

Air in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater

Fault Cause Remedy

Page 223: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

223Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting 15

15.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES

15.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES (error diagnostics)

Fault Cause Remedy

Refrigerator does not switch on when operating in 240 V mode

No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power supply

240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 240 V au-tomatic circuit breaker

240 V operating voltage too low

Have the 240 V power supply checked by an au-thorised specialist work-shop

Refrigerator does not switch on when operating in 12 V mode

Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) in the starter battery is de-fective

Replace jumbo flat fuse (40 A) in the starter bat-tery

Flat fuse (2 A) in the starter battery is defec-tive

Replace flat fuse (2 A) in the starter battery

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V operating voltage too low

Have the 12 V power supply checked by an au-thorised specialist work-shop

Refrigerator does not switch on when operating in gas mode

The "GAS" operating in-dicator flashes yellow

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Air in the gas pipe Repeat ignition 3 or 4 times

Cobwebs or burnt resi-due in the burning cham-ber

Remove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber

Error code Cause Remedy

1 The 240 V power supply is 75 % under the required op-erating voltage

Contact customer service

2 The 12 V power supply is 75 % under the required op-erating voltage

Contact customer service

3 The refrigerator is operated at 240 V, even though no 240 V mode has been se-lected

Contact customer service

4 The refrigerator is operated at 12 V, even though no 12 V mode has been selected

Contact customer service

Page 224: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

224 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting15

15.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series with AES

5 The refrigerator is operated in gas operation mode even though gas operation mode has not been selected

Contact customer service

6 The gas valve has been identified as open even though it should be closed

Contact customer service

7 The gas valve has been identified as closed even though it should be open

Contact customer service

8 The 240 V power supply is 20 % under the required op-erating voltage

Check 240 V power supply

9 The gas supply has been cut off. The flame has not been ignited within 30 seconds in gas operation mode

� Check the gas supply� Repeat ignition 3 to

4 times� Contact customer service

10 The refrigerator is set to 12 V mode and the vehicle engine is not running

Start the vehicle engine or select a different energy source

11 The refrigerator is set to "AU-TO" mode and no energy source is available

Provide an energy source and reset the refrigerator. Switch the refrigerator off and on again for this purpose

12 – Contact customer service

13 The temperature sensor is defective

Check whether the plug is in-serted properly above the fin inside the refrigerator. If so: Contact customer service

14 The connection between op-erating controls and control device is interrupted

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Indicator lamps "230 V", "12 V" or "AUTO" are not lit green

Refrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigera-tor with energy selector switch

No electrical operating voltage

Connect 240 V power supply

Let the vehicle engine run

Switch on or replace the fuse

Contact a specialist workshop

Refrigerator does not switch to 12 V mode dur-ing the journey

Operating voltage of al-ternator is not present/too low

Contact a specialist workshop

Error code Cause Remedy

Page 225: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

225Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting 15

15.7 Air conditioning unit

15.7.1 Dometic

Refrigerator does not switch on in gas opera-tion, "GAS" indicator lamp is not lit yellow

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Cobwebs or burnt resi-due in the burning cham-ber

Remove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber

"GAS" indicator lamp flashes yellow, no gas

Air in the gas pipe Switch off the refrigera-tor with energy selector switch

Open regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap of the re-frigerator

Switch on the refrigera-tor with energy selector switch. After 10 seconds, the AES will attempt an-other ignition

If the "GAS" indicator lamp flashes yellow again after approx. 30 seconds, the failure has not been remedied yet

Repeat this process two to three times for ventila-tion. If the refrigerator cannot be operated, con-tact customer services

Fault Cause Remedy

Air conditioning unit does not cool

No 240 V power supply Connect the vehicle to the local power supply

Temperature below 16 °C

Temperature has been set incorrectly

Adjust the temperature

Thermostat defective Contact customer service

Air conditioning unit does not warm up

No 240 V power supply Connect the vehicle to the local power supply

Temperature above 30 °C

Temperature has been set incorrectly

Adjust the temperature

Thermostat defective Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Page 226: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

226 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting15

15.7.2 Truma

15.8 Water supply

Water is entering the ve-hicle

Drainage holes for con-densation are clogged

Clean air conditioning unit

Seal is defective Contact customer service

No more air circulation Air filter clogged Clean air filter

Fan wheel defective Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Air conditioning unit does not cool

No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power supply

Fuse is defective Check fuse and replace if necessary

Temperature below 16 °C

Temperature has been set incorrectly

Adjust the temperature

Air filter contaminated Replace air filter

Fault Cause Remedy

Leakage water inside the vehicle

A leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect water pipes

No water Water tank is empty Top up with fresh water

Drain cock not closed Close drain cock

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup-ply on

Fuse of the water pump is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Water pump defective Exchange water pump (have it exchanged)

Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or replace

Transformer/rectifier de-fective

Contact customer service

Water pump switched off on panel

Switch water pump on

Toilet has no flush water Water tank is empty Top up with fresh water

Fuse for cassette is de-fective

Replace fuse

Display for water and waste water indicates a wrong value

Measuring probe in the waste water or water tank is soiled

Clean water/waste water tank

Measuring probe is de-fective

Replace measuring probe

Fault Cause Remedy

Page 227: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

227Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting 15

15.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)

Waste water tank cannot be emptied

Drain cock is clogged Open the cleaning cap on the waste water tank and drain the waste wa-ter. Rinse the waste wa-ter tank well

Drain on the one-hand le-ver mixer is clogged

Perlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de-calcify in vinegar water (only for products made from metal)

Water jets on the shower nozzle clogged

Water jets calcified De-calcify shower nozzle in vinegar water (only for products made from met-al) or rub off soft nozzle burling

Water drains from the shower tray slowly or does not drain at all

The vehicle is not in a horizontal position

Position the vehicle hori-zontally

Fault Cause Remedy

Water doesn't remain in toilet bowl

Seal dirty or defective Clean seal or have re-placed

Water does not flow properly into the toilet bowl

Water pressure too low Contact customer service

Water is entering the ve-hicle

Hose connection loos-ened

Check connections for proper seat and tighten hose clamps

Vacuum pump does not run

No power present Control power supply (or have checked)

Vacuum pump runs too often

Cap or connection not sealed tightly

Check connections be-tween toilet and vacuum (or have checked)

Toilet clogged Improper used Remove blockage

Fault Cause Remedy

Page 228: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

228 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Troubleshooting15

15.10 Body

Fault Cause Remedy

Flap hinges/door hinges are difficult to operate

Flap/door hinges are not sufficiently lubricated

Lubricate flap hinges/door hinges with acid-free and resin-free grease

Hinges/joints in the bath-room unit/toilet compart-ment are difficult to operate/make a grating noise

Hinges/joints are not suf-ficiently lubricated

Lubricate hinges/joints with solvent-free and acid-free grease

� Spray cans often contain solvents

Storage compartment hinges are difficult to op-erate/make a grating noise

Storage compartment hinges are not sufficiently lubricated

Lubricate storage com-partment hinges with acid-free and resin-free grease

Front bonnet swivel sys-tem is difficult to operate

Front bonnet swivel sys-tem is not (sufficiently) lu-bricated

Lubricate front bonnet swivel system with acid-free and resin-free grease

Heki skylight difficult to operate

Threaded spindle not lu-bricated

Lubricate threaded spin-dle

Threaded spindle defec-tive

Have threaded spindle replaced

� Our Dethleffs dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts requirement.

Page 229: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

229Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Special equipment 16

16Special equipment16.1 Weight details for special equipment

Weight details for Dethleffs special equipment are listed in the table below. If these objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the standard equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calculating the payload.

All weight details are approximate.

Observe the max. permissible gross weight.

� The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.

� Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety.

� No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-ations to the vehicle.

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

Waste water tank, insulated 2

Airbag 2

Alcove window, hinged 2

Caravan coupling 26-46

Hinged window 1

External shower 1

Outside kitchen 10

Outside storage compartment (lowered rear) 59-63

Automatic transmission 10-40

Car radio and CD 2

Oven 14

Skylight (clear glass) 1

Roof rack with aluminium ladder 17

"Kissenschlacht" (pillow fight) decoration package 1

Swivel console, seat 3

Extractor hood 5

Duomatic switching facility 1

Entrance step 2

Driver's cabin carpet 3

Driver's cabin door 17

Bike rack for 3 bicycles 9

Bike rack for 4 bicycles 10

Roman shades, driver's cabin 3

Flat screen 4-6

Floor warming unit, electrical 9

Page 230: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

230 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Special equipment16

External gas socket 1

Holder for flat screen 3-5

Lift-tilt skylight (Heki 3) 22

Trumatic C 6002 heater, electric kit 1

Insect screen door 3

Insulation mat for driver's cabin window 2

Air conditioning unit 32-40

Driver's cabin air conditioning unit 30

Refrigerator, separate freezer compartment 20

Awning 300 cm 21

Awning 350 cm 25-35

Awning 400 cm 27-40

Awning 450 cm 32

Awning 500 cm 36

Awning 600 cm 40

Microwave oven 15

Motorcycle rack/bike rack 40

Navigation system 4

Guest bed 5

Radio preparation 1

Reversing camera incl. monitor 5-10

Satellite unit 19-24

Rear mud flaps 2

Service flap 5-8

Safety kit 5

Seat covers in the driver's cabin and living area 3

Solar installation 15

Supports (2 pieces) 6

Tempomat 2

Chain-stitch rug, laid loosely 6-9

Awning light 1

Alde hot-water heater 35

Hazard warning triangle and first-aid kit 2

Alde heat exchanger 5

Winter covering for the refrigerator grating 1

Winter comfort package (depending on equipment) 15-65

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

Page 231: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

231Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Special equipment 16

Additional heater, driver's cabin (independent vehicle heater)

7

Additional pump for the Alde heater 1

Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona) 3

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

Page 232: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

232 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Special equipment16

Page 233: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

233Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes 17

17Helpful notesChapter overviewThis chapter contains helpful tips for the journey.

The instructions address the following topics:

� road assistance in European countries� traffic rules in European countries� gas supply in European countries� toll regulations in European countries� safe ways to spend the night during travel� camping in winter

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important equipment for the journey.

17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries

Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law applies in case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following rules when travelling abroad:

� Take the green insurance card with you.� Always register accidents with the police.� Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.

17.2 Help on Europe's roads

� The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the countries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your automobile club or embassy for further information.

� In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents.

Country Emergen-cy services

Police

Breakdown service

Belgium 112

112

TCB Brussels 0 70 34 47 77

Bulgaria 150

166UAB (02) 9 80 33 08/146 1)

Denmark 112free of charge

112free of charge

Falck 79 42 42 42

Germany 112

110ADAC 22 22 22 1)

Estonia 112

110/112 1)

EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88 1)

Finland 112

112

Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00

France 15/112 1)

17/112 1)

Lyon (08) 25 80 08 22

AIT-Assistance 0800 08 92 22

Page 234: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

234 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes17

Greece 112

171/112 1)

ELPA 104 00

Great Britain 112

112

AA (08 00) 0 28 90 18/

(08 00) 82 82 82 1)

Ireland 999/112 1)

999/112 1)

AA Dublin 18 00 66 77 88

Iceland 112

112

F.I.B 5 11 21 12

Italy 118/112 1)

112

ACI 803 116/8 00 11 68 00 1)

Croatia 94/112 1)

92/112 1)

HAK 9 87/ 0 19 87 1)

Latvia 03/112 1)

02/112 1)

LAMB 8 00 00 00

Lithuania 03/112 1)

02/112 1)

LAS 8 80 00 00 00/18 88 1)

Luxembourg 112

113/112 1)

ACL 2 60 00

Macedonia 194

192

AMSM 196

Montenegro 94

92

AMSCG 9807

Netherlands 112

112

ANWB 08 82 69 28 88

Norway 113

112

NAF 81 00 05 05

Austria 144/112 1)

133/112 1)

ÖAMTC 120

Poland 999/112 1)

997/112 1)

PZM 022 5 32 84 33

Portugal 112

112

ACP Lissab. (21) 9 42 91 03ACP Porto (22) 8 34 00 01

Romania 961/112 1)

955/112 1)

ACR (021) 2 22 22 22/

(021) 2 22 15 53 1)

Russia 03

02

RAS (4 95) 7 47 66 66

Sweden 112

112

M 0 20 91 29 12

Country Emergen-cy services

Police

Breakdown service

Page 235: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

235Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes 17

Date 03/2007Specifications without guarantee

17.3 Speed limits and permissible dimensions

For information, the speed limits (in km/h) and permissible dimensions (in m) of the countries visited most:

Switzerland 144

117/112 1)

TCS 1 40/03 18 50 53 11 1)

Serbia 94

92

AMSS (011) 19800

Slovakia 155/112 1)

158/112 1)

SATC 1 81 24

Slovenia 112

113

AMZS (1) 9 87/

(003861) 5 30 53 53 1)

Spain 061

112

RACE 9 15 93 33 33

Czech Republic 155/112 1)

158/112 1)

UAMK CR 12 30

Turkey 112

155/112 1)

TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40

Ukraine 03

02

112 UA (8-032) 2 97 81 12

Hungary 104/112 1)

107/112 1)

MAK

1 88/(0036-1) 13 45 17 44 1)

Cyprus 112

112

AA 02 22 31 31 31

1) In the mobile communication network

Country Emergen-cy services

Police

Breakdown service

� Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries.

Page 236: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

236 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes17

Country Max. dimen-sions in me-ters

Gross weight

In built-up ar-eas

Outside built-up ar-eas

Motor-way

Width Lgth.

Belgium 2.55 12 Up to 7.5 t

Over 7.5 t

50

5090/120 1)

60/90 1)

120

90

Bulgaria 2.60 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

50

90

70

130

100

Denmark 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

50

80

70

130

80

Germany 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t

3.5 t up to7.5 t

Over

7.5 t 2)

50

50

50

100

80

80

130 3)

100

80

Estonia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

50

90

70

110

70

Finland 2.60 12 50 80 4) 80 4)

France 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5090 5)/-

80 5)/

100 1) 5)

130 5)

110 5)

Greece 2.50 12 50 90/110 12) 120

Great Brit-ain

2.55 12 48 96/112 1) 112

Ireland 2.55 12 50 80/100 1) 120

Iceland 2.55 12 50 90 6) –

Italy 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

50

90/110 1) 7)

80

130 7)/

150 12) 8)

100

Croatia 2.55 12 50 90/110 1) 130

Latvia 2.50 12 Up to 7.5 t

Over 7.5 t

50

5090/100 12)

80

110

80

Lithuania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

50

90

70

110

70

Luxem-bourg

2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5090 9) 7)

75 7)

130 9) 7)

90 7)

Macedo-nia

2.50 12 50/60 80 80

Montene-gro

2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5080/100 1)

80

100

80

Nether-lands

2.5510)

12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5080/100 1)

80

120

80

Norway 2.55 12.40 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5080/90 1)

80

90

80

Page 237: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

237Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes 17

Austria 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

50

100

70130 11)

80

Poland 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5090/100 1)

70/80 1)

130

80

Portugal 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5090/100 12)

80/90 12)120 13)

110 13)

Romania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5080/90 1)

80/90 1)

120

110

Russia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

60

6090 14)

70

110 14)

90 14)

Sweden 2.60 24 15) Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5070-110 1) 12)

80/90 1)

110

90

Switzer-land

2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over

3.5 t 16)

50

5080/100 1)

80/100 1)

120

100

Serbia and Mon-tenegro

2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

60

6080/100 1)

80

100

80

Slovakia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

60

60

90

80

130

80

Slovenia 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

5080/100 1)

80

100

80

Spain 2.55 12 50 90/100 1) 120

Czech Re-public

2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t

Over 3.5 t

50

50

90

80

130

80

Turkey 2.50 10 50 80 90

Ukraine 2.50 12 60 90 14) 110 14)

Hungary 2.50 12 Up to 2.5 t

Over 2.5 t

50

5090/110 1)

70

130

80

Cyprus 2.55 12 50 80 100

1) On expressways, on roads with more than one lane in each direction2) Vehicles over 7.5 tons max. permissible weight require a tachograph3) Recommended speed: 130 km/h4) Since 1995, for the first time, vehicles up to an unladen weight of 1875 kg and vehi-

cles up to 3.5 t perm gross weight with appropriate equipment (ABS, driver airbag, seat belts on all seats) can drive max. 100 km/h

5) On wet roads, reduce speed by 10 km/h, on motorways by 20 km/h6) On unmade roads (gravel): 80 km/h7) In wet conditions, reduce speed by 20 km/h8) In wet conditions generally 110 km/h

Country Max. dimen-sions in me-ters

Gross weight

In built-up ar-eas

Outside built-up ar-eas

Motor-way

Width Lgth.

Page 238: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

238 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes17

Date 03/2007Source: ADACSpecifications without guarantee

17.4 Driving with low beam in European countriesThe following is a list of the European countries in which driving with low beam is required even during the day.

9) Drivers who don't have their driver's licence for the full year, must not drive faster than max. 75 km/h when out of town or 90 km/h on motorways

10) On main roads 2.55 m, on roads marked "B" 2.20 m11) Between 10 p.m. and 5 a.m. the speed limit on the following motorways is

100 km/h: A10 (Tauernautobahn), A12 (Inntalautobahn), A13 (Brennerautobahn), A14 (Rheintalautobahn)

12) According to traffic signs13) Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than one year must not drive

faster than 90 km/h. Corresponding stickers (available from ACP offices) must be affixed in a clearly visible position on the rear of the vehicle

14) Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than two years must not drive faster than 70 km/h

15) Swedish campsites often require the motorhome to have a closed waste water system

16) A heavy goods vehicle supplement must be paid on all roads for all vehicles exceeding 3.5 tons max. permissible weight

Country Conditions

Denmark All year; on all roads

Estonia All year; on all roads

Finland All year; on all roads

Iceland All year; on all roads

Italy All year; only outside of towns

Croatia All year; on all roads

Latvia All year; on all roads

Lithuania From September 1 to April 1; on all roads

Macedonia All year; on all roads

Montenegro All year; on all roads

Norway All year; on all roads

Austria All year; on all roads

Poland From October 1 to March 1; on all roads

Portugal From October 1 to March 1; on all roads

Romania All year; on all roads

Russia All year; only outside of towns

Sweden All year; on all roads

Switzerland All year; on all roads

Slovakia From October 15 to March 15; on all roads

Page 239: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

239Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes 17

Specifications without guarantee

17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas

Slovenia All year; on all roads

Czech Re-public

All year; on all roads

Hungary All year; only outside of towns

Country Conditions

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

Belgium X X On highway rest areas max. 24 hours permitted

Bulgaria X X

Denmark X X On streets and squares only up to 11 hours with a parking disc

Germany X X Staying overnight for one night to restore driving ability is per-mitted. There may be regional and local limitations

Finland X X Possible with the permission of the land owner

France X X Permission from the local au-thorities or the owner of the land is required. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is pro-hibited

Greece X X Staying overnight for one night at designated areas on the na-tional route Patras-Athens-Thessaloniki is permitted

Great Britain X X

Ireland X X

Italy X X Staying overnight for one night at car parks and service stations is allowed. Observe the local regulations. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is pro-hibited

Croatia X X

Luxembourg X X

Macedonia X X

Netherlands X X Overnight stays on streets and squares is allowed in some bor-oughs

Page 240: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

240 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes17

Specifications without guarantee

Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest are-as and cultivated grounds. Trav-elling on dirt roads is prohibited

Austria X X Staying overnight for one night to restore driving ability is per-mitted, but not in nature re-serves. Observe regional and local restrictions. Generally for-bidden in Tyrol

Poland X X Requires property owner's per-mission

Portugal X X Staying overnight for one night on motorway service stations and car parks under 10 hours are tolerated

Romania X X

Russia X X

Sweden X X Not on agriculture areas or in the vicinity of houses. Driving on open fields is prohibited

Switzerland X X One overnight stay at highway rest areas and in some cantons is tolerated

Serbia and Montenegro

X X

Slovakia X X Overnight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present

Slovenia X X

Spain X X Some regional prohibitions ap-ply, especially on beaches

Czech Repub-lic

X X Overnight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present

Turkey X X

Ukraine X X

Hungary X X Staying overnight on privately owned land is permitted only with police certification

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

Page 241: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

241Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes 17

17.6 Gas supply in European countries

General tips Always observe the following instructions:

� Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles.� Use all of the gas bottles' capacity.� Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas

bottles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator to foreign gas bottles.

� During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component (butane does not gas below 0 °C).

� Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only use gas bottles with safety valves.

� When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compart-ments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries do not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.

17.7 Toll regulations in European countriesMany European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll regulations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country. Nevertheless, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe.

As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be familiar with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. For example, in Austria the vignette does not meet the toll requirements for vehicles that weigh more than 3.5 t. There, a so-called "Go-Box" must be obtained and charged.

Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.

17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travelPrudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe night in the motorhome.

The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules are observed:

� Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and skylights.

� During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking areas located along typical vacation routes.

� Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease the chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the parking site.

� Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site.� When parking on open space keep emergency routes clear. The way to the

driver's seat should be clear. The ignition key should always be within reach.

� In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It is not always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign country. Get information about the connection system in the country you are travelling to before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club or in the trade press.

� Windscreens with solar filters can affect the functioning of automatic toll collection systems (e.g. Go-Box). This must be taken into account when acquiring the appropriate device (e.g. Split-Go-Box).

Page 242: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

242 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes17

� Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate vicinity of windows or doors.

� Always lock up the vehicle.

17.9 Tips for winter campersThe following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable as possible.

� Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are often booked up early.

� Do not start your trip without winter tyres.� Bring snow chains.� Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you.

Snow and ice may melt.� When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent

freezing.� No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation.� Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice.� Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents mois-

ture from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area.� Cover the single-paned driver's cabin window with insulation mats to avoid

thermal bridges.� Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries".� Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so

that the supply does not run out during the night.� Only operate the gas system using propane gas.� Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.� Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the

vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning.� Lay the 240 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen

or be damaged (e.g. during snow removal).� When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly.

A few centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow quickly becomes a heavy burden.

� Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof to avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".

17.10 Travel checklistsThe following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home although not everything on the checklists might be necessary.

� Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information) as well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before com-mencing the trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will save unnecessary trouble.

Object Object Object

Kitchen area Wiping cloth Cleansing agent (detergent)

Salad servers

Mug Dishcloths Chopping board

Turnspit Set of knifes and forks for grilling

Bowls

Page 243: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

243Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes 17

Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the dishes

Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the dishes

Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches

Lighter Spoons Cups

Bottle opener Knifes Plates

Air-tight storage boxes

Garbage bags Thermos jug

Breakfast plate Frying pans Pots

Forks Stirring spoons Glasses

Bathroom/sanitaryitems

Towels Toilet brush Toothbrush glass

Sanitary items Toilet paper

Living area Dustbin Insect lamp Rain clothes

Road atlas Insect repellent First aid kit

Bath towels Deck of cards Travel guides/park-ing guide

Bath shoes Broom Rucksack

Batteries Candles Sleeping bags

Bed sheets Dust pan Pencils and paper

Bed linen Coat-hangers Shoes

Laundry bag Clothes brush Shoe polish

Books Pillow Vacuum cleaner

Camping guide Map Flash light

Spare bulbs Medicine Pocket knife

Water bottle Music cassettes Table cloth

Binoculars Neck-supporting pillow

Clothes pins

Fire extinguisher Sewing kit Clothesline

Gas bottle Radio

Vehicle/tools Waste water con-tainer

Fabric tape Screwdriver

Adapter socket Watering can for fresh water

Current-measuring instrument

CEE adapter Cable reel Step

Wire V-belt Wheel chocks

Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit

Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack

Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri-angle

Object Object Object

Page 244: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

244 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Helpful notes17

Replacement wa-ter pump

Luster terminals Warning sign

Hammer Loops Warning vest

Flat wrench Tube adapter Flashing hazard warning light

Gas filling adapter Hose clips

Gas tube Snow chains (win-ter)

Outside Stay rope Camping table Lock

Bellows Luggage racks String

Camping chairs Grill Tent pegs/tighten-ing ropes

Documents List of addresses Registration book Identity card

Registration confir-mation(s)

Driving licence Passport

Allergy certificate Green insurance card

Writ of protection

Instruction manuals Vaccination certifi-cate

Vignette/toll card

Instruction leaflets for medicines

Credit card Visa

Object Object Object

Page 245: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

245Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Index

12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132For the starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133For Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135On the living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

12 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 12512 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 124, 12512 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 124, 125Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

240 V automatic circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . 136240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 131, 132

Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

240 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 125240 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

AAccess ladder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89Access ladder, overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Access ladder, pull-down bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Accessories, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Add-on parts see special equipment . . . . . . . . . 20Air conditioning unit

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Air conditioning unit (Dometic)Adjusting air current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Air conditioning unit (Truma)Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Air outlet nozzles, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138AL-KO rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Armrest, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Automatic power selection (AES) . . . . . . . . . . 168

Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona)Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

BBackrest adjustment mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Basic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Basic menu, calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 123, 130Battery capacity alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Battery defect message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118Battery see starter battery and living area battery . . . . 110Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118Battery separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Battery voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . 119, 122, 128Battery, wardrobe light, changing . . . . . . . . . . 207Beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Bike rack

Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Travelling with a loaded bike rack . . . . . . . . 34

Blind, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Blind, skylight with snap latch

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Blind, windowClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Boiler (Alde)Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 160Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158Safety/drainage valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158Summer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 160Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159

Page 246: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Index

246 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

BonnetClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 217

Braking system, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 217Branch block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Breakdown services in Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Halogen spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Living area lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Recessed halogen light . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 206Spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Surface-mounted halogen light . . . . . . . . . 206Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89Access ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89Safety net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89

Butane gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 102

CCable reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Camping gas bottles, use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 102Camping in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Cap, water drain neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Capacity of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Caravan coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Driver's cabin insulation mat . . . . . . . . . . . 191Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Furniture surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192High-pressure cleaner, washing with . . . . . 189Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199In the winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Net curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192Synthetic parts, interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Teflon coverings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195Toilets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Carpet, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Central seating group

Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Sleeping conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 93

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213Charging current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 195

Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38For the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Initial start-up after temporary lay-up . . . . .197Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Children's beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86, 88, 89Circulating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Circulating pump, setting the rotational speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 141Cleaning see care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189Closed circuit current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

On the double acrylic glass pane . . . . . . . . .65On the screwed connections in the floor . . . .65

Condensation water see condensation . . . . . . . .65Connecting cable see power cable . . . . . . . . . .132Conventional load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 62

Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Roman shade, closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Roman shade, opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Conversion door, insideLocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60

Conversion door, outsideLocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58

Page 247: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

247Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Index

Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

DDanger of suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 65Date, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Defrosters, switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . 128Dimensions, permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Discharging current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Displays

Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 122, 128Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Waste water tank level . . . . . . . 120, 123, 130Water tank level . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 123, 130

DisposalHousehold waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Sewage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Waste water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58Doors

Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Double floor, load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Drain cock, water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Drain neck, water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Driver's cabin insulation mat, care . . . . . . . . . 191Driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Driver's door, inside

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Driver's door, outsideLocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Adjusting an appropriate seating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45Armrest, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Turning it to driving position . . . . . . . . . 43, 44

Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Driving the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Duomatic switching facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

EElectrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

240 V connection, troubleshooting . . . . . . . 218Entrance step, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 217Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Lighting, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Electrically adjustable external mirrors . . . . . . . 48Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 53

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Pulling out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Pushing in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Warning tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Environmental tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior lighting

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189External connection see 240 V connection . . . . 55External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Flap lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 64

External gas connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105External mirrors, electrically adjustable

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Mirror heater, switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Filter, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

FFault current protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Filling level of the waste water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Filling level of the water tank, displaying . . . . . 130Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Fire

Behaviour in the event of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Extinguishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Fire risks, avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Fixed bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Page 248: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Index

248 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Fixed tableMoving in a crossways direction . . . . . . . . . 80Moving in a lengthways direction . . . . . . . . . 80

Flap lockClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64Elliptical-shaped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64With recessed handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Flat screen, positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83Floor warming unit, electrical

Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Fluorescent tubes, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Living area lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Folding mechanism, overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . 85Forced ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 65Freezer compartment door locking mechanism

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Locking in the ventilation position . . . . . . . 174Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Fresh water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 175Fresh water filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Front bench seat, sleeping conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 97, 98Front passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Adjusting an appropriate seating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45Armrest, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Turning it to driving position . . . . . . . . . . 43, 44

Front seating group, sleeping conversion . . . . . 99Fuel filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Furniture flaps, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Furniture surfaces, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Fuse box see 240 V automatic circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Fuses

12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132240 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 136For the starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133For the Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135On the living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Fuses see 12 V fuses and 240 V fuse . . . . . . . 132

GGas bottle compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 102Gas bottles

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 102

Gas connection, external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Gas consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103Gas cooker

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 137

Gas odour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 101, 220Gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 164Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Gas supply in European countries . . . . . . . . . .241Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 101, 220General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 101Switching automatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Gas tube, check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 102General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7Guarantee certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7Guarantee conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

HHalogen spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45Heat exchanger (Alde)

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Heat exchanger (Arizona)Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Heat exchangers, heater, replacement . . . . . . .137Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Air outlet nozzles, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .138Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 141Heat exchangers, replacement . . . . . . . . . .137

Page 249: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

249Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Index

Hot air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Initial start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Heater for the waste water tank and waste water pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Heater, external mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Heki skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Ventilation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233High rate of gas consumption . . . . . . 22, 101, 220High-pressure cleaner, washing with . . . . . . . 189Hinged skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Locking in ventilation position . . . . . . . . . . . 74Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Hinged window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68Continuous ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68

Hot air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Hot-air heater

Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 141Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 141Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 142Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 141Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Hot-water heater240 V electrical operation, selecting . . . . . 145Auxiliary circulating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Fluid level, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Gas and 240 V electrical operation, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Gas operation, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Heater, switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Heater, switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Heating fluid, topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Heating system, bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Rotational speed, circulating pump . . . . . . 147Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

IIndependent vehicle heater

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Indicator lamp, 12 V power supply . . . . . . 121, 125Indicator lamp, 240 V power supply . . . . . 121, 125Indicator lamp, toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185Information stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Initial start-up

After temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197After winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Inner door, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Insect screen door

Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Folding in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Insect screen, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Insect screen, conversion door

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Insect screen, Heki skylightClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Insect screen, hinged skylightClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Insect screen, windowsClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Insect screen, wind-up skylightClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Inspection records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Inspection plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Interior lighting

Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

KKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Page 250: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Index

250 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

LLadder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89Ladder, overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Ladder, pull-down bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Ladder, rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 202

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Lay-upTemporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Leakage water inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 226Lift-off table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Conversion to bed foundation . . . . . . . . . . . 82Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Lighting

Lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Lights see bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Living area battery

Battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 123, 130Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Charging current, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 124Discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Discharging current, displaying . . . . . . . . . 124Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 219Voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 122, 128

Living area lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Double floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Rear garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Rear storage space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Load rack for roof loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Load see also payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Lock

Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58External flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

MMaintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 202

Air conditioning unit (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . .202AL-KO rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . . . . .201

Mass in ready-to-drive condition . . . . . . . . . .27, 29Maximum permissible gross weight . . . . . . .27, 29Mechanical steady legs

Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55Length, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55

Microwave ovenSwitching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

NNet curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191No gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220Nose weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

OOdour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Off-load voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Oil level, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Operating modes

Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . .152Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 158Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 141Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168, 170Switching automatics, gas system . . . . . . .107

Oven see gas cooker or gas oven . . . . . . 161, 162, 163Overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Access ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85Folding downwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Folding mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85Folding upwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Safety net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

PPanel (DT 220) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Basic menu, calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Battery voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Date, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Defroster, switching on and off . . . . . . . . . .128Filling level of the waste water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Page 251: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

251Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Index

Filling level of the water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Software version panel, displaying . . . . . . 128Tank heater, switching on and off . . . . . . . 130Time, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Water pump, switching on and off . . . . . . . 130

Panel (IT 20-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11912 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Battery voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Filling level of the waste water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Filling level of the water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Panel (IT 992) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12212 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Battery voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Filling level of the waste water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Filling level of the water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Switch for water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Panel see also displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 122Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Example calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29

Payload see also load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Permissible gross weight see maximum permissible gross weight . . . . . . 26Personal equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Power cable for the 240 V connection . . . . . . . 132Propane gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 102Pull-down bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Access ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Safety net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36PVC-floor covering, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

RRear axle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Rear garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Rear ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Folding downwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Folding upwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Rear storage space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Recessed halogen light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 206

Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 16612 V operation, switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 172240 V operation, switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 171, 172Change-over between energy sources . . . 169Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 173Frame heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Gas operation, switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Gas operation, switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168, 170Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Refrigerating temperature control . . . . . . . 169Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223, 224Ventilation grill, removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Refrigerator door locking mechanismClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174Locking in the ventilation position . . . 173, 174Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174

Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal . . . . . . . . 166Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Remote control, air conditioning unit (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Risk of frost damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 175, 181Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Notes for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Roman shade, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Roman shade, driver's cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Roman shade, Heki skylightClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Roman shade, hinged skylightClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Roman shade, window of conversion doorClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Roman shade, windowsClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Roman shade, wind-up skylightClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Roof rack, load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Page 252: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Index

252 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Roof rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Round seating group, sleeping conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95

SSafety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 101Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Safety net, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89Safety net, overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Safety net, pull-down bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Safety/drainage valve boiler . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Fastening correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Seating arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Seating groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Seats, rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Sink, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Skylight with snap latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73

Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73

Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 74Sleeping conversion

Central seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92, 93Front bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 97, 98Front seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Round seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95

Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 64Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Sliding windowClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Software version panel, displaying . . . . . . . . . . 128Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Underneath the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Spare wheel support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Weight details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Speed limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Spotlight

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Starter batteryCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . 119, 122, 128

Staying overnightAway from camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . .239During travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

Steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55Length, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55

Supports see steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55Surface-mounted halogen light . . . . . . . . . . . . .206Suspension table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Conversion to bed foundation . . . . . . . . . . . .78Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Reducing size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Switch for water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176Switching automatics, gas system . . . . . . . . . .106Swivel table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Conversion to bed foundation . . . . . . . . . . . .79Fastening to the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

SymbolsFor instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 137

Synthetic parts in the toilet and living areas, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

TTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Table, fixed

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80Moving in a lengthways direction . . . . . . . . .81Table-top, folding to the side . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Tank alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131Tank heater, switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . .130

Page 253: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

253Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Index

Tank lid see fuel filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Teflon coverings, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 82

Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Pulling out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Swiveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Thetford cassette, retaining clip . . . . . . . . . . . 187Thetford toilet

Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Water tank, emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Water tank, filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Time, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Water tank, emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Toilet cassetteEmptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Toll regulations in European countries . . . . . . 241Total discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . 233Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Travel cots suitable for children . . . . 85, 86, 88, 89Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . 225Air conditioning unit (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . 226Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Boiler (Alde) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Furniture flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Inner door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223, 224Starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Vacuum toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

TV cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Tyre change see changing wheels . . . . . . . . . 213Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Excessive wear . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 38, 211, 215General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Load-carrying capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Tyre selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

UUnderbody, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Unladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

VVacuum toilet

Emptying valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Page 254: Instruction manual - Dethleffs

Index

254 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN

Vario toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Converting into a shower cubicle . . . . . . . . 188Converting into toilet compartment . . . . . . 188

Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Vehicle manuals and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Vehicle, washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Volume of waste water, displaying . . . . . . 120, 123Volume of water, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 123

WWardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Warning stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Washer fluid, filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Washing with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . 189Waste gas vent on the right hand side of the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 155Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 180Filling level, displaying . . . . . . . . 120, 123, 130Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Waste water tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Water drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 180

Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Water pump, switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Water supply

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Water systemEmptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Fresh water filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Water tankFilling level, displaying . . . . . . . . 120, 123, 130Water drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Water, draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Water tank see also water system . . . . . . . . . . 176Weatherproof guarantee

Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Inspection plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Inspection stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Weight details for special equipment . . . . . . . .229Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Wheel rim size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Wheel rim type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Window winders, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Window, conversion door

Roman shade, closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Roman shade, opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 71

Wind-up skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Writing and reading rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49


Recommended